JP5587476B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, and more particularly, on the basis of the establishment of start conditions, the variable display means for displaying deriving the variable display was carried out display result of the identification information of a plurality of types that can identify each The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived and displayed.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, there is provided variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) when the game medium wins in the winning area (start condition is established), and the variable display means displays variable display of the identification information. Some are configured to be able to be controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result is a specific display result (big hit symbol).

  As such a gaming machine, a specific effect mode is selected and selected from a plurality of notice elements according to the determination result of whether or not to obtain a specific display result and the selected effect mode. A device for displaying a notice element has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-246964 A

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, the possibility that the rendering mode becomes the specific display result is not notified, but the reliability of the specific display result is changed only by displaying the notice element. For this reason, the effect of the notice effect is likely to decrease, and it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the notice effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to increase the player's attention to the notice effect and improve the game entertainment.

(1) To achieve the above object, a game machine according to claim of the present application, based on the establishment of start conditions (e.g. at step S231 and step S235 such that it is determined No), can identify each Specific display results (for example, a definite special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol, a definite decorative symbol for a big hit combination, etc.) on variable display means that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and decorative symbols) ) Is a game machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of detecting an action by the player. and means, when said start condition is satisfied, pre-determining means for determining the display results derived displayed before Symbol variable display means whether or not said specific display results (e.g. PU103 steps S240, the portion, and so on) that perform the processing of S241, prior determination by the predetermination means, beginning Doban constant means for determining whether or not is determined in the specific display result (e.g. CPU103 steps S405 , A part that executes the processing of S411) and a single notice effect that executes a single notice effect based on the detection result by the detection means in the variable display that satisfies the start condition based on the determination result by the prior decision means execution means (for example presentation control CPU120 is based on such notice pattern determined in step S659, the portion including executing the processing in step S535), based on a determination result of the start Doban constant means, said variable display continuous announcement attraction executing means for executing the rylene connection announcement attraction cotton on the variable display of a plurality of times in means (e.g. The outgoing control CPU 120 determines a continuous notice pattern in step S705, and then executes the process of step S535 based on the notice pattern determined in steps S635 and S640. and Kitan German announcement attraction before being executed by the execution unit, in accordance with the prior Killen continued advance notification effect executed by the continuous announcement attraction executing means, shown in percentage (for example, FIG. 41 to be controlled to the specific game state Big hit reliability etc. are different.

According to this structure, in accordance with the single announcement effect and the continuous announcement attraction, reliability different controlled to a specific game state. Thereby, a player's attention with respect to both a single notice effect and a continuous notice effect can be raised, and a game interest can be improved.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the numerical value extraction means for determination extracts the variable display in which the start condition is not yet satisfied even though the game medium has passed the predetermined start area. Reservation storage means (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B) that can store the numerical value for determination within a predetermined upper limit storage number (for example, “4”, etc.) ), A gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, a normal state), or a special gaming state (for example, a short-time state or a probable change state) advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state. The game state control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S324 and S325) and the variable display means are controlled based on the establishment of the start condition. Variable display control means for starting variable display of the identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S110 to S113), and the holding storage means is a first start in the predetermined start area Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through an area (for example, the first start winning opening), the first holding storage unit (for example, the first special figure holding unit) that stores the determination numerical value extracted by the determination numerical value extracting unit The area for storing the random number value MR1 in the storage unit 151A) and the determination medium based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second starting area (for example, the second starting prize opening) of the predetermined starting area. Second reservation storage means for storing the determination numerical value extracted by the numerical value extraction means (for example, an area for storing the random number MR1 in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B); The variable display control means includes a variable display of the identification information corresponding to the numerical value for determination stored in the second reserved storage means, and the numerical value for determination stored in the first reserved storage means. Priority execution control means (for example, a part that executes the process of step S235 when the CPU 103 is Yes in step S231) that executes in preference to the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the The means is a start-time determination limiting means (for example, the CPU 103) that limits the determination based on the determination numerical value extracted when the game medium passes through the first start area when the special game state is controlled. And the like.

  In such a configuration, the variable display of the identification information based on the passage of the game medium through the second start area has priority over the variable display of the identification information based on the passage of the game medium through the first start area. Executed. When the special gaming state is controlled, whether or not the specific display result is determined by the starting time determination means based on the determination numerical value extracted by passing the game medium through the first starting area. No judgment is made. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first starting area. Can be suppressed.

  (3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above includes operation means (for example, the operation button 30) that can be operated by a player, and the single notice effect execution means is executed by the continuous notice effect execution means. As the single notice effect to be combined with the continuous notice effect, an operation time notice effect based on an operation on the operation means is executed (for example, the CPU 103 selected in step S651 when the continuous notice execution flag is on). With reference to the single notice type determination table 142, the single notice type CTY2 is determined in step S653).

  In such a configuration, the operation time notice effect is executed as a single notice effect combined with the continuous notice effect. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced and the game interest can be improved.

  (4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), a variable display used for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined starting area. Variable display determination numerical value extraction means (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 extracts the random value MR3 in step S218) for extracting a determination numerical value (for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type). And the variable display determination value extracted by the variable display determination numerical value extraction means for the variable display for which the start condition is not yet satisfied even though the game medium has passed the predetermined start area. Variable display hold storage means (for example, first special figure hold memory) capable of storing numerical values within the range of the predetermined upper limit storage number (for example, “4”, etc.) 151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B), and the variable display hold storage means corresponding to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied when the start condition is satisfied. And the determination information (for example, variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132D) in which determination values are assigned to a plurality of types of variable display patterns. Variable display pattern determination means for determining the variable display pattern (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S261 to S271) and the variable information pattern based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determination means. Variable display execution means to be executed (for example, based on the variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in step S271). And the variable display determination numerical value extracted by the variable display determination numerical value extraction means when the game medium passes through the predetermined start area, and the like. At the time of starting to determine whether the variable display pattern determining means determines a specific variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) among a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the determined value Pattern determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S408 to S410 and S414 to S416), and the continuous notice effect execution means is based on the determination result by the start-time pattern determination means. A notice effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the processes and steps of steps S156 and S157). After executing the processing of Steps S164 and S165, based on the determination of Yes in Step S614, the continuous notice pattern is determined in Step S705, and the processing of Step S535 is performed. The same determined value is assigned to the specific variable display pattern regardless of the number of reserved storages in the variable display reservation storage unit, while the variable display pattern other than the specific variable display pattern is variable. Different determination values are assigned according to the number of reserved storages in the display storage unit (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D and FIG. 26, the variation pattern types CA2-4 with super reach include While common decision values “230” to “251” are assigned, variables without super-reach The pattern type, such that different determinations are allocated).

  In such a configuration, when the game medium passes through the starting area, a specific variable display pattern is determined based on the variable display determination numerical value extracted by the variable display determination numerical value extraction means and the determined value. It is determined whether or not. Based on this determination result, a continuous notice effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the possibility of a specific variable display pattern by executing a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable displays, and to improve the gaming fun. In addition, the determination table is assigned a common determination value regardless of the number of reserved memories for a specific variable display pattern, and the number of reserved memories for a variable display pattern other than a specific variable display pattern. Different decision values are assigned accordingly. As a result, the execution time of the average variable display is varied according to the number of reserved memories, for example, the efficiency of variable display is increased when the number of reserved memories is large, while the variable display is interrupted when the number of reserved memories is small. Can be prevented from decreasing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for production | presentation counted by the production | presentation control board side. It is a figure which shows the structural example of various control pattern tables. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a continuous notice start determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a continuous notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a single notice classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a single notice pattern determination table. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a specific pattern common range. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous notice determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous notice start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting process during continuous notice. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a single notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot reliability according to the combination of a continuous notice effect and a single notice effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation operation | movement performed combining the continuous notice effect and the independent notice effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation operation | movement performed combining the continuous notice effect and the independent notice effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of a single notice pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the continuous notice start setting process in a modification. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of the independent notice determination process at the time of a continuous notice.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, in response to the start of either the first special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "", "middle", and "right", the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold memory number) is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the presence or the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the start condition that is satisfied is satisfied. Variable display is held.

  As an example, in the start winning memory display area 5H, from the left in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning corresponding to each of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening. A plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed are provided to the right. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening. One of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) (for example, the display part at the left end of the display part corresponding to the first start winning opening that is not displayed) is changed to blue display. . Also, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied based on the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. Then, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (for example, the leftmost display part of the display area corresponding to the non-displayed second start winning opening) is changed to red display. Thereafter, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure is established, for example, one of the display parts corresponding to the first start winning opening (for example, blue display is displayed). The display part at the right end of the display part) is returned to non-display. Further, when the start condition (second start condition) for the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, for example, one of the display parts corresponding to the second start winning opening (for example, red display). The display part at the right end of the display part) is returned to non-display.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number as an effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. For this reason, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game occurs. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure The number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure The reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, special symbols variably displayed in the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B are separated from the decorative symbols. May be provided with a special symbol variable display area for display as identifiable. As an example, in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbols can be changed in the special symbol variable display area. Variation of the effect image indicating “「 ”,“ 「”, “×”, etc. corresponding to the display is started. Thereafter, in response to the fact that the special symbol variable display in the special symbol game is terminated and the confirmed special symbol is stopped, “◎” predetermined corresponding to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol variable display area. It is only necessary to stop and display effect images such as “O” and “X”. For example, if the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a big hit symbol, “◎” is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variable display area, and if it is a small bonus symbol, “○” is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In some cases, “x” may be stopped and displayed.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG.

  Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 7 is opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) into the special prize winning opening, and therefore, the second disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate. The operation button 30 may be a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. The operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. Operation may be possible. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation button 30 only needs to be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 30 is detected by the operation detection switch 31 shown in FIG.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is established due to the above, it is started based on the fact that the first start condition is established, for example, due to the end of the last special game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has passed (entered) through the second starting winning port formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied due to the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, it is started based on the fact that the second special start game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If the special symbol different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the result is “lost”. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  Of the special symbols that show the numbers "1", "3", and "7" that will be jackpot symbols, the special symbols that show the numbers "3" and "7" will be the 15 round jackpot symbol, and the number "1" The special symbol shown will be a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special winning winning ball door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled. However, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Is changed to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In this way, the special prize opening door that has opened the special prize opening during the round is received a special ball, which receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the special prize opening. The device 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15-round big hit state, every time a game ball wins a big winning opening 60, 15 balls (prize balls) are obtained. The 15 round round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the period for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the period in which the grand prize opening is opened by the grand prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state It becomes. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round becomes a second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round, by changing a predetermined winning opening serving as a big winning opening from a closed state to an open state, etc. The second state that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the state may be returned to the second state after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed.

  In such a two-round big hit state, 15 game balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds). It is very short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In addition, the big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round execution times compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. For example, the round execution number is small round specific gaming state. While the state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small-round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period for the multi-round specific gaming state (for example, 29 seconds) ) May be shorter. That is, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is that the period in which the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each round is a second period shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state, The number of executions may be at least one of the second round numbers less than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the big hit symbols of 15 rounds, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, time reduction control (time reduction control) in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. Controlled to short state when done. Here, the normal state is a normal game state as a game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a probability change state, and a short time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that it is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is not probable. It is called a jackpot symbol (also called “normal jackpot symbol”). Further, the fact that the non-probability variable big hit symbol out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R non-probable big hit” (also referred to as “15R normal big hit”).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the big hit symbol of 15 rounds, the special symbol that shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the status is over, or after the 2 round jackpot state has ended based on the special symbol showing the number “1” that will be the 2 round jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game, As one of the special game states different from the normal state, for example, the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed together with the short time control in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. Be controlled. In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot game state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. Further, the fact that the probability variable big hit symbol of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed until the second number of times (the number of executions equal to the second round number) is reached. Is done. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two round big hit state, the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in the first state is the second. Control may be performed so that at least one of the number of times is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set to the first state by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. .

  The probability variation state may include not only the time variation control and the high opening control performed together with the probability variation control, but also the state where only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control and the high opening control are not performed. As an example, after the end of the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “15R probable big hit”, the first probable state (high accuracy (Also called a high base state). After that, when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the probability variation control is continuously performed, but the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed. It is also possible to control to a second certain variation state (also referred to as a high certainty low base state) that is not performed after the completion of. In addition, after the end of the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special game is “abrupt big hit” in the normal state, the state shifts to the second positive change state and only the positive change control is performed. However, the time reduction control and the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “surprise big hit” when in the probability changing state or the short time state, the state shifts to the first probability changing state, Short time control and high opening control may be performed together with the probability variation control. Alternatively, after the 15-round big hit state based on “15R probable big hit”, the control is made to the first positive change state until the special figure display result becomes “big hit” again, while the 2-round big hit state based on “surprise big hit” After the completion of, the transition to the first certain change state is made, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the second certain change state is entered. It may be. While the short-time control and the high-open control are started and ended simultaneously (interlocked), the start and end of the probability variation control is not necessarily linked to the start and end of the short-time control and high-open control. May be.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (expected degree of big hit) Becomes higher.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and after changing the decorative symbol again, stop display. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a special combination pseudo as shown in FIG. 3A is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as the consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 3A or the like is a decorative symbol displayed temporarily in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is a “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. Accordingly, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, one that is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is 1 It may be controlled to increase one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled. As another example, an effect model (movable member) provided inside or outside the game area is operated during the period of each change display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. It may be controlled. As yet another example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during the period of each change display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or in place of some or all of these re-change effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of the effect model, display of effect images The re-variation effect may be executed by combining some or all of them. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. In the case where the effect mode changes, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the possibility of “15R probability variable big hit”, and the like may increase.

  The production operation executed as the re-variation production may include any production operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9. Also, for example, differences in the output of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L, 8R, differences in the movement of the production target object (eg, production model, etc.) (differences in operating speed, differences in operating distance, differences in operating direction, etc.) Depending on the movement of the character image displayed on the image display device 5 (difference in movement speed, difference in movement distance, difference in movement direction, etc.) The effect mode in the re-variation effect may be made different by changing the character display instead of the image or changing the display of the background image. Further, in addition to the re-variation effect executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped, for example, audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped and displayed by an arbitrary production operation such as the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9.

  In addition to “slip” and “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. Expectation is enhanced. Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped temporarily for the decorative combination (special combination) that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. After the display, unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the effect display that changes the decorative symbol to be stopped by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach display or variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run”, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying a message as an image, outputting sound, etc. As described above, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative design may reach a reach state due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative design, and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “effect image display” and “operation notice” are set to be executable. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the notice effect of “effect image display”, effect display for displaying any of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance, for example, in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed during variable display of the decorative design. In the notice effect of “notice at the time of operation”, display of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed, for example, when a predetermined operation on the operation button 30 by the player is detected during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The production operation is changed by changing the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  As an example, in the notice effect of “notice at the time of operation”, a predetermined effect operation serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of a decorative symbol. The button operation promotion effect is an effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5. If it is. The effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image. The effect that causes a predetermined sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED for lighting or blinking with a predetermined lighting pattern, one for operating a production model provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or a combination of these Also good. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is set. When the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected by the operation detection switch 31 within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and prepared in advance, for example. One of the plurality of types of effect images is displayed on the image display device 5, and the sound effect corresponding to one of the plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance is displayed on the speaker 8L. Various effects such as output from 8R are executed.

  In addition to “effect image display” and “operation advance notice”, for example, various effect operations such as “step-up operation” are executed as the notice effect by the effect operation different from the decorative display variable display operation. Also good. Here, in the notice effect of “step-up operation”, as an example, a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5 during variable display of decorative symbols. An effect operation may be performed such that the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages by the effect display. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched. Further, as another example of the notice effect of “step-up operation”, the effect model provided inside or outside the game area is operated in a plurality of types of operation modes in a predetermined order during the variable display of the decorative pattern. An effect operation in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages may be performed by the effect operation. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after the effect model performs the effect operation in one kind of operation mode, the effect operation in the notice effect is terminated without switching to the effect operation of the second stage. There may be. As described above, the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is executed in response to one start winning prize (one game ball has passed through the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). This is a kind of notice effect that is executed during variable display of symbols and decorative designs, and is a step-up notice effect that changes the notice style (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) in multiple stages (steps up). . In general, the greater the number of changes (number of steps), the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). Further, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R non-probable variation” Of the promotion from “big hit” to “15R probable big hit”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In addition, there is a possibility that the variable display result may be “big hit” or “small hit” over the variable display of decorative symbols executed multiple times corresponding to multiple special drawing games, etc. A notice effect for informing the player that there is a possibility that variable display (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) may be executed may be executed continuously. Such a notice effect continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. On the other hand, the notice effect performed in response to a single variable display is also referred to as a single notice effect. The last variable display among the multiple variable displays for which the continuous notice effect is executed is a variable display for which the possibility of the variable display result being a “big hit” is notified by the continuous notice effect. It is also referred to as a variable display that is subject to notice by a notice effect. When the continuous notice effect is executed, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory information of the special figure game is notified before the variable display to be notified is started. The notice effect is started. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a continuous notice effect can be executed over two to four variable displays.

  After the continuous notice effect is started, for example, every time variable display of decorative symbols is executed, a plurality of effect modes are provided by effect display that selectively displays a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order. An effect operation that changes (steps up) in stages may be performed. At this time, as the number of times of change (the number of steps) increases, the possibility (reliability) of the variable display result to be “big hit” or “small hit” may increase. Further, the object to be notified may change depending on the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In this embodiment, the single notice effect may be executed together with the continuous notice effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. At this time, it is only necessary to change the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” according to the combination of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect. The combination of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect here includes a combination of whether or not the single notice effect is executed together with the continuous notice effect, and the contents of each notice effect of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect (effects) It is only necessary to include a combination of (aspect). When the single notice effect is executed together with the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect may be executed simultaneously (in parallel) during variable display, or continuous notice effect in one variable display. Or one of the single notice effects may be executed first and then switched to the other notice effect.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a non-probable variable jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a 15-round jackpot symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined non-probable variation big hit combination (also referred to as “normal big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are non-probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). . Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming an uncertain variable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination is stopped. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “non-probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the short time state is controlled.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the situation, after reaching the same reach effect as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change", or the reach effect different from when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" For example, after the process is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the definite decorative combination of the probable big hit combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as “probability change” variable display mode (also referred to as “hit type”) when the variable display result is “hit”.

  When the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed, if the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. . Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. The confirmed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination and the definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination are also collectively referred to as a definitive decorative symbol of a big winning combination (specific combination).

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable big hit combination or a probable variable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again to change, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a probable big hit combination is not changed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A change promotion promotion effect that derives and displays a symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern The changing promotion success effect during the stop display of the symbol may be executed, or the changing promotion failure effect during the change may be executed.

  After the definitive decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is derived and displayed, the next round will start after one round ends in the big hit gaming state at the start of the big hit gaming state or during the round in the big hit gaming state. During the big hit, which is a notification effect on whether or not to control to the probable change state in the period until the start, the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the last round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect informing that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decoration pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion in a promiscuous state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probable variable symbol or the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display What is necessary is just to alert | report so that a player can recognize the presence or absence of the promotion which will be in a probability change state by displaying the effect image different from.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is a two-round big hit symbol is stopped or displayed, or a special symbol indicating the number “2” which is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative patterns predetermined as the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. 3B, for example. One of the above may be stopped. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number of “1” which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is variable. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprising accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is controlled.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accuracy”, the accuracy mode start effect may be executed during variable display of the decorative symbols. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to the big hit type being “Accuracy”. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the accuracy mode may be started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is executed during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and continues from the variable display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed. When the suddenness mode start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be erased, and after the suddenness mode start effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. In the sudden accuracy mode, for example, until the variable display result is “big hit” and the probability variation state ends, the effect in the sudden accuracy mode is performed. In the effect in the sudden accuracy mode, the display mode of the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 is different from the display mode in the normal rendering mode, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The sound to be different from the sound in the normal effect mode, the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED to be different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or a part of these Alternatively, by combining all of them, it may be informed so that the player can recognize that the mode is inaccuracy.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for notifying that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or a background image or a decorative pattern display mode in the display region of the image display device 5 is displayed. May be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, for example, so that the player can recognize that the player is in the probability change state. Alternatively, in the probability variation state, for example, the player may be unable to recognize or difficult to recognize that the probability variation state is caused by the same effect mode as in the normal state or the short time state (so-called latent probability variation). .

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulating circuit has a diode whose anode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the stage control board connector corresponding to the stage control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, a pre-determined result indicating whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT data is set according to the big hit type determination result of whether the variable display mode (big hit type) of the decorative symbol in the case of “big hit” is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” Is done. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the fluctuation pattern shown by the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command and the variable display result shown by the variable display result notification command can be specified by one production | presentation control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state, and the command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the probability change state, The command 9502H may be a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the short time state.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. With the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening or the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of rounds (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, or the big winning in the 2 round big hit state or the variable winning operation Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, a continuous performance operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start time of variable display of the decorative symbols to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Or, in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, depending on whether it is a period in which the big prize opening is in an open state or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state, different performance operations May be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit state and / or small hit game state, some or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, and the winning end designation command are all or part of Instead of being transmitted, the effect operation in the two round big hit state and / or the small hit game state may be executed by the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command.

  The command B1XXH is a first special symbol display based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning is generated. This is a first start slot winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the device 4A is established. The command B2XXH is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning has occurred, and the second special symbol is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the display device 4B is established.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening winning designation command notifies a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. It is also used as an effect control command. The second start opening prize designation command is an effect control command for notifying a determination result using predetermined numerical data at the time of the second start winning place, which is a time of detecting a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening Also used as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 4C, in the first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the predetermined pattern used for determining the variation pattern is used. The variable display determining numerical value (for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type) is associated with a specific variation pattern (for example, super reach) regardless of the reserved memory number of the special figure game (special figure reserved memory number). Different EXT data is set depending on whether the variation pattern is within or outside the specific pattern common range. More specifically, the command B100H and the command B200H notify that they are outside the specific pattern common range, while the command B101H and the command B201H notify that they are within the specific pattern common range.

  In addition, in the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, a predetermined specific display result determining numerical value (for example, special figure display) used for determining whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” is determined. Different EXT data is set according to the determination result of whether or not the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the numerical value data (random number MR1 for determining the result). More specifically, the command B102H and the command B202H notify the winning time determination that is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small win”. On the other hand, the command B100H, the command B101H, the command B200H, and the command B201H are notified that it is determined that the special figure display result is not determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”. In addition, the winning time winning determination is not limited to the case where it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit”, but only when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”. May be included. Alternatively, the winning time winning judgment includes only when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” and is controlled to the 15 round big hit state. May be.

  Furthermore, in the first start opening winning designation command, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening during the big hit when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, EXT data that can specify that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected during the time-shortening control in the time-shortening state. More specifically, the command B103H notifies of a big hit / short / medium winning that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected during the big hit or during the short-time control.

  The command C0XXH displays the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 in an identifiable manner. This is a special figure reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number which is the total value with the reserved memory number. The special figure hold memory number notification command is executed when, for example, either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or the special start game is executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Corresponding to the start or the like, following the transmission of either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command, the main board 11 sends it to the effect control board 12. The In the special figure hold memory number notification command, for example, the total number of hold data (for example, “0” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. ), Different EXT data is set. As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special game is executed. Is received, the special figure hold storage number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the total storage of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is received. The number can be specified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the random number circuit 104 and the I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control, so that the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) executes the following ( Specifically, this means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 103 as a random counter. It may be updated by software using Further, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “1”. A value in the range of “251” is taken. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game ( It is used to determine whether or not to change from a normal open state) to a state (expanded open state) where game balls can easily pass (enter).

  FIG. 6 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 are prepared in advance as non-reach fluctuation patterns. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. The hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” include the change pattern PA4-1, change pattern PA4-2, change pattern PB4-1, change A pattern PB4-2, a fluctuation pattern PA5-1, a fluctuation pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are the variation patterns. Are prepared in advance. Further, a fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and a fluctuation pattern PC1-5 are prepared in advance as hit fluctuation patterns corresponding only to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  FIG. 7 shows the variation pattern types in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 6 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 7, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are prepared in advance in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and “variable” variable display mode, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display result (big hit type) of “big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable pattern type CA 3-1 to the variable pattern type CA 3-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. ing. Furthermore, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only in the case where the variable display result is the “big hit” and “variable display type” (big hit type).

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of “no shortening” in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed. , A variation pattern PA1-1 previously associated with “no shortening” is included. The variation pattern type CA1-2 is, for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol in response to the total reserved memory number being “3” or more, or the time shortening control being performed in the probability variation state or the short time state. It is a variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which the time is shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” are not executed, and includes a variation pattern PA1-2 previously associated with “with shortening” It is out. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of “sliding, pseudo-continuous” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” or “sliding” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. A variation pattern PA1-3 and a variation pattern PA1-4 previously associated with “slip, pseudo-ream” are included.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is ended with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream”. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of the reach combination, and a variation pattern PA2-1 and a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous” PA2-2 is included. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is two times. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation twice” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of reach combination when the production is finished, and is associated with “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation twice” in advance. Variation pattern PB2-2.

  In the variation pattern type CA2-3, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is one, and the normal display is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation once” that derives and displays a determined decorative symbol of reach combination when the production is finished, and is associated with “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation once” in advance. Variation pattern PB2-1. Fluctuation pattern types CA2-4 are accompanied by super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state, and when the reach production ends, the definite decorative symbols of the reach combination are derived and displayed. Variation pattern type of “super reach (losing)”, variation pattern PA 3-1, variation pattern PA 3-2, variation pattern PB 3-1, variation pattern PB 3-associated with “super reach (lack)” in advance. 2 is included.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) pseudo-ream” for deriving and displaying symbols, and includes a variation pattern PA4-1 and a variation pattern PA4-2 previously associated with “no normal reach (big hit) pseudo-ream”. Yes. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) quasi-ream” and includes a variation pattern PB4-1 and a variation pattern PB4-2 previously associated with “normal reach (hit) quasi-ream”. . Fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 is a “super reach (big hit)” that displays a definite decorative symbol of a big hit combination when super reach is included after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and the reach effect is finished. The variation pattern type includes a variation pattern PA5-1, a variation pattern PA5-2, a variation pattern PB5-1, and a variation pattern PB5-2, which are associated with “super reach (big hit)” in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is one of the 2nd release chances TC1 to TC4. Are included in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are variation patterns in which the confirmed decorative design is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4, and the variation pattern type CA4. −1. The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a method of deriving and displaying a definite decorative pattern of reach combination after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is a variation pattern type of “open reach reach loss”, and includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “2 times open reach loss”. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns in which the determined decorative symbol is a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 130 is displayed when the first start condition for allowing the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, or in the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition that allows the start of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special symbol is derived and displayed, Random value for determining the special figure display result whether to control the big display game with the variable display result as “big hit” or whether to control the small display game with the variable display result as “small hit” It is a table referred to in order to make a decision based on MR1.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probabilistic state) (Determined value) is assigned to one of the special chart display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined with reference to the same special figure display result determination table 130.

  On the other hand, each of the case of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Correspondingly, determination tables with different allocations of determination values for special figure display results may be prepared. In this case, in the case of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, The assignment of the decision value to the special chart display result of “small hit” may be different. As an example, in the case of a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, as compared to the case of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, A determination value may be assigned to each special figure display result so that the ratio determined to the special figure display result of “small hit” is low.

  With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability that the variable display result will be “small hit” is reduced compared to the special figure game using the first special figure. If the game ball easily passes (enters) through the 2nd starting prize opening due to the high opening control in a short time or short time state, the special figure display result is “small hit” and the little hit that hardly gets the prize ball It is possible to prevent the gaming state from being controlled, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency of the special game in the game will be increased, the time from the probability change state or short-time state (particularly the probability change state) to the 15th round big hit state will be shortened by such setting, and the game entertainment will be reduced. The effect that can be suppressed is great. Further, in the case of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, a determined value is assigned so that the special figure display result of “small hit” is not determined. May be.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 sets the variable display mode to “hits” based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 12 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, and the second special symbol display device 4B has the second value. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable change” or “probability change” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15th round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the big round hit state. The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while being assigned to the jackpot type of “probability” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, the allocation of the determined value for each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the jackpot type of “probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned. When the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “100” is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type, while the variation special figure designation buffer value is “ In the case of “2”, the decision value is not assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 9, the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to control to the two round big hit state with the big hit type as “surprise”. With this setting, when the game ball is easy to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening in the high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is “surprise” and most of the prize balls are It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to a two-round big hit state that cannot be obtained, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency at which the special game is executed is increased, such a setting has a great effect of suppressing the decline of the game entertainment. In addition to this setting, the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, so that 15 rounds from the probability variation state and the short time state can be obtained. The ratio of hitting big hits can be increased to improve the gaming fun.

  Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, for example, a smaller decision value than that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. You may be made to do. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state, if the big hit type is “surprise” and the game shifts to the probable change state after the end of the two round big hit state, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Thus, when the gaming state is the short-time state, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type determination table 131 is assigned so that the determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. The table data may be configured.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10A, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 10B, and FIG. The loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10 and the loss change pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprising change”. (Determined value) is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3, variation pattern type CA4-1, and variation pattern type CA4-2. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 differs. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, while the variation pattern type CA4- No determination value is assigned to 1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1 to CA4-2. No decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to the “surprise”, the variation pattern type different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is determined. can do.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Depending on whether the big hit type is determined to be “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern type. Thereby, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” can be varied depending on which variable pattern type includes variable pattern execution. For example, when the jackpot type is “probable change”, a large number of decision values are assigned, while when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, variable display is performed using a variation pattern included in the variation pattern type to which a small decision value is assigned. In such a case, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” is increased.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, a part of the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “surprise” in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. . As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and in the case where the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. Is set to The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B may be set so that a determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type different from the variation pattern type that can be determined when the big hit type is “surprise”. Good. In other words, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. , Each may be set to include a unique variation pattern type.

  When the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D are determined (predetermined) as the special figure display result to be “lost”, the variation pattern type is determined. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used when the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened, for example, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of reserved memories is less than “3”. Selected as the table used. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is special when, for example, the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more even in the normal state. The table is selected as a use table when a predetermined variation time reduction condition for shortening the variable display time of symbols and decorative symbols is satisfied.

  Note that the variation pattern type is determined by referring to different determination tables when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state and when the gaming state is a normal state and the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more. You may be made to be. Further, the variation pattern type may be determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether or not the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number other than “3” or not. Alternatively, instead of the total number of reserved memories, depending on whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is possible to change the variation pattern type by referring to a different decision table. A decision may be made. In this case, when the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3” or the like), a variation pattern having a shorter variable display time than when the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined number. The determined value may be assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to the variation pattern type to be included increases. Alternatively, even when the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short time state, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and different determination tables are set according to the determination result. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to the reference. For example, if the total number of stored storages is less than a predetermined number in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is selected as the use table, while the probability variation state or the time reduction state exists. Sometimes, if the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D may be selected as the use table.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA1-. 1 to a variation pattern type CA1-3 and a variation pattern type CA2-1 to a variation pattern type CA2-4. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. There is a part that. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation pattern type CA2-1 is different. . Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on whether or not the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, there are portions where determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 and the variation pattern type CA2-3, while the variation pattern type CA1-1 and the variation pattern A decision value is assigned to the type CA2-2. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern type CA2-2, while the variation pattern type CA1-2. Further, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-3. Thereby, depending on whether or not the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure display result is “losing” and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories Regardless, the variation pattern type CA2-4 including a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is determined. That is, when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is any one of “230” to “251”, at least super reach is involved regardless of the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories. The variable display of the decorative design is executed.

  In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value for each variation pattern type depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. The assignment may be different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value is set to a different variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short-time state. It may be assigned. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  In this embodiment, by referring to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation The pattern type can be determined as any one of the pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, by referring to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, It is possible to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state.

  The determination values assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 and the variation pattern type CA1-3 in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D are the variation patterns in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C. It is larger than the determined value assigned to the type CA1-1 and the variation pattern type CA1-2. With such a setting, when the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened, it is determined that the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is not set to the reach state at a higher rate than when the variable symbol is not shortened. If the average variable display time in the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to be shorter than the average variable display time in the reach fluctuation pattern, the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number (specifically, “ 3 ") or more, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in the probabilistic state or the short time state, the total number of stored storages in the normal state As compared with the case where is less than a predetermined number (specifically, “3”), the average variable display time can be shortened.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 133A shown in FIG. 11A and a hit variation pattern determination table 133B shown in FIG. 11B are prepared in advance as variation pattern determination tables.

  The loss variation pattern determination table 133A is based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc., when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the special figure display result is “loss”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “lost”. Or, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-3 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 6, the variation pattern PA1-3 is a variation pattern that executes a “slip” variable display effect when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable pattern effect such as “slip” is executed by being determined by the variation pattern PA1-3. Can do. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-4 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 6, when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 has pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect. ) Is executed once. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed by being determined as the variation pattern PA1-4. Can do.

  Note that the ratio determined for the variation pattern for executing the variable display effect may be different depending on whether the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened. As an example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. 10D, a smaller determination value is changed than in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132C shown in FIG. It may be assigned to the pattern types CA1-3. In the example of setting the variation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the special pattern variation time (variable display time of the special symbol) in the variation pattern PA1-1 in which variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” are not executed is 12000 ms (milliseconds). ), The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is set to 3000 ms. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 for executing the “sliding” variable display effect is 16000 ms, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 for executing the “quasi-continuous” variable display effect. Are respectively set to 24000 ms. That is, when the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the special pattern change time in the change pattern PA1-3 for executing the “slip” variable display effect, or the change pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. The special figure fluctuation time in PA1-4 is longer than the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern in which these variable display effects are not executed.

  For example, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “3”) or more, there is a variation pattern for executing variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” compared to a case where the total number is less than the predetermined number. A determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to the included variation pattern types CA1-3 is low. As a result, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Further, for example, in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-3 is larger than that in the normal state when the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (for example, “3”). A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so as to be lower. As a result, the average variable display time can be shortened when the probability change state or the time reduction state is set, compared to when the total number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number in the normal state.

  When the hit variation pattern determination table 133B is determined (pre-determined) as the special figure display result to be “big hit” or “small hit”, the fluctuation pattern determination random number is determined according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR4. In the winning variation pattern determination table 133B, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Are assigned to one or a plurality of variation patterns (per variation pattern).

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 12, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 12 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A in this way becomes hold storage information indicating that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball in the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of the game (the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B in this way becomes hold storage information indicating that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held.

  The general-purpose holding storage unit 151C stores the holding information of the general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common figure hold storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball in association with the hold number in the order in which the game ball has passed the passage gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 19 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 20, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process should be selected / executed in the ordinary symbol process shown in step S16 of FIG. 19 in order to control the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20. Instruct.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The small hit flag is set to an on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to a probability change state, while being cleared to an off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being in the probability change state or the time reduction state and the time reduction control is started, while the probability change state or the time reduction state is ended. It is cleared and turned off in response to.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a variable symbol display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first start winning determination counter, a second start winning determination counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, and a total reserved memory number counter. , A short time counter, a round counter, etc. are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a part of the numerical data indicating the random number value used for controlling the progress of the game. This is for the CPU 103 to count the data so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as random count values. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start port switch 22A is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal from the first start port switch 22A is ON, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has normally entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected. Judgment is made. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal is OFF or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal from the second start port switch 22B is ON, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally detected. Is made. In addition, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when the signal state in the second start winning signal is determined to be off, or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter is used to count the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed until the time reduction control is ended when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the time reduction state. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is decremented by 1 every time the special figure game ends. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction flag is cleared and turned off, for example, to control to end the time reduction state and shift to the normal state.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round game is finished and the next round game is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating whether a game ball that has entered the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port is detected. As an example, “1” is set in the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, “2” is set to the variable special figure designation buffer value. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the big hit type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 9, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0”, and the big hit type is “probable change”. If there is, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “1”, and if the jackpot type is “surprise”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “2”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, while the production control CPU 120 is built in the production control microcomputer, at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the production control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may be any one that is built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, the effect control board 12 is also connected to wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 30 has been detected from the operation detection switch 31.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, on the side of the production control board 12, the random value SR1-1 for determining the continuous notice start, the random value SR1-2 for determining the continuous notice pattern, and the single notice type determining The numerical data indicating the random number SR2-1 and the random number SR2-2 for determining the single notice pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the final stop symbol used for determining a final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the decorative symbol may be controlled to be countable.

  The random value SR1-1 for determining the start of continuous notice is a random value used for determining whether or not to start execution of the continuous notice effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “399”. The random value SR1-2 for determining the continuous notice pattern is used to determine the continuous notice pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect (effect form) when the continuous notice effect is executed as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. This is a random value to be used, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “400”.

  The random number SR2-1 for determining the single notice type determines whether or not the single notice effect is to be executed, and determines the single notice type to be one of a plurality of types prepared in advance when it is determined to be executed. This is a random value to be used, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”. The single notice pattern determination table is a random value used to determine the notice pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect (effect form) when the single notice effect is executed as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “500”. Note that the range of values that each random value takes is shown as an example, and can be set to an arbitrary range.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  For example, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 may include the symbol variation control pattern table 170 shown in FIG. 14A, the notice effect control pattern table 171 shown in FIG. The symbol variation control pattern table 170 variably displays the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from when the decorative symbol variable display is started until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped. Any data may be used as long as it stores a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents related to the operation as a symbol variation control pattern. The notice effect control pattern table 171 only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of effect operations in a plurality of kinds of notice effects, such as continuous notice effects and single notice effects, as the notice effect control patterns. Note that the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 may be an address management table for managing storage addresses of pattern data constituting a plurality of types of control patterns. In this case, in the ROM 121, table data constituting the control pattern table may be stored in a predetermined storage area, and pattern data constituting individual production control patterns and the like may be stored in an area different from this storage area. .

  The plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 170 are each of decorative symbols performed using a finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol, a temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped during variable display, or the like. In the variable display, it is only necessary to define a time schedule such as the display position and size of the decorative design, the direction of change and the speed of the decorative design. Here, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, and the like may be determined at the start of variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command.

  In the setting example of the symbol variation control pattern table 170 shown in FIG. 14A, one symbol variation control pattern is prepared for each of a plurality of variation patterns. On the other hand, a plurality of symbol variation control patterns may be prepared corresponding to one variation pattern. As an example, corresponding to one variation pattern, a symbol variation control pattern in the case of executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, and a symbol variation control pattern in the case of not performing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. , May be prepared in advance. Even when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the “pseudo-continuous” variable on the side of the effect control board 12 is changed. By deciding whether or not to execute the display effect, and selecting a different symbol variation control pattern as a use pattern according to the determination result, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed. Also good.

  The plurality of types of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 171 are each provided with a notice pattern YPA1-1 and a notice pattern prepared in advance to execute a single notice effect such as a continuous notice effect and “effect image display”. YPA1-2, notice pattern YPA2-1, notice pattern YPA3-1, notice pattern YPA4-1, and notice pattern YPB1 to notice pattern YPB4 prepared in advance to execute the single notice effect of “notice during operation” Corresponding to any of these, a time schedule such as the display position and size of the effect image, the update display procedure, the setting of the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation action on the operation button 30, and the setting of the change of the effect operation when the operation is detected As long as it stipulates. In this embodiment, a continuous notice effect can be executed by using a combination of (or repeatedly) a plurality of notice effect control patterns for executing a single notice effect of “effect image display”. It should be noted that the continuous notice effect may be executed by using a notice effect control pattern prepared separately from the notice effect control pattern for executing the single notice effect of “effect image display”.

  Various effect control patterns such as a symbol variation control pattern stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 170 and a notice effect control pattern stored in the notice effect control pattern table 171 are control data for controlling various effect operations. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series. An effect control code is attached to each effect control pattern, and the effect control pattern may be determined, set, or specified using this effect control code. In this embodiment, the production control code is shown as a code for identifying each production control pattern. Or the storage address (start address) of each effect control pattern in the ROM 121 may be used as the effect control code. That is, the format of the effect control code is arbitrary as long as each effect control pattern can be identified.

  FIG. 14C shows the contents of effects corresponding to each notice effect control pattern stored in the notice effect control pattern table 171. Of these, the notice effect control pattern with the effect control code STC1-1, the effect control code STC1-2, the effect control code STC2-1, the effect control code STC3-1, and the effect control code STC4-1 is the notice pattern YPA1. -1, Balloons appear in the single notice effect of “Continuous notice effect” or “Production image display” corresponding to each of the notice pattern YPA1-2, the notice pattern YPA2-1, the notice pattern YPA3-1, and the notice pattern YPA4-1 It consists of process data for displaying such effect images. In these notice effect control patterns, the number of balloons that appear and the display color of the balloons differ from each other, so that the variable display result can be “big hit” or “small hit”, or a specific fluctuation pattern (super It is only necessary to be able to notify the possibility that variable display based on a variation pattern with reach, etc.) is executed with different expectations.

  The notice effect control pattern to which the effect control code STB1-1 and the effect control code STB1-2 are attached is the notice effect control pattern to which the effect control code STB2-1 and the effect control code STB2-2 are attached to the notice pattern YPB1. The notice effect control pattern in which the effect control code STB3-1 and the effect control code STB3-2 are added to the notice pattern YPB2, and the effect control code STB4-1 and the effect control code STB4-2 are assigned to the notice pattern YPB3. The notice effect control pattern is obtained from process data for displaying an effect image of a scene through which a bow and arrow passes when the operation button 30 is operated in a single notice effect of “operation notice” corresponding to the notice pattern YPB4. It is configured. In these notice effect control patterns, it is only necessary to be able to notify the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” by different expectations by changing the number of bows and arrows passing through and the display color of the arrows and arrows. . In addition, when the continuous notice effect is not executed in the variable display in which the single notice effect of “operation notice” is executed, the effect image of the scene through which the bow and arrow pass when the operation button 30 is operated (effect control code STB1-1). Only STB4-1) should be selected and displayed. On the other hand, at the time of continuous notice execution in which the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the single notice effect of “operation notice” is executed, for example, an effect image (effect control that causes a balloon to appear in the continuous notice effect) Code STC1-1 to STC4-1) is selected and displayed, and subsequently, an effect image (effect control code STB1-2 to STB4-2) corresponding to the single notice effect is selected and the display is switched. Thus, an effect operation that becomes a connection effect may be performed.

  As an example, in the notice effect control pattern to which the effect control code STB1-2 or the effect control code STB2-2 is attached, an effect image in which the balloons appearing in the continuous notice effect fly away as the connection effect E1 or the connection effect E2. May be displayed. As a result, if the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period, an effect is produced in which the balloons fly away without passing the bow and arrow, while the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. Even if the bow and arrow do not hit the balloon, an effect that the balloon will fly away as long as it passes through may be executed. On the other hand, in the notice effect control pattern to which the effect control code STB3-2 or the effect control code STB4-2 is attached, when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected as the connection effect E3 or the connection effect E4, the continuous notification The effect image may be displayed so that the balloon that appears in the effect bursts with the passage of the bow and arrow. When the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period, the effect image is displayed such that the balloons appearing in the continuous notice effect fly away as in the case of the connection effect E1 or the connection effect E2. You just have to do it. As a result, if the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period, an effect is produced in which the balloons fly away without passing the bow and arrow, while the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. When this is done, it is only necessary to perform an effect in which the bow and arrow hits the balloon and the balloon bursts.

  Further, when the final notice effect in the continuous notice effect is executed during the continuous notice effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the single notice effect of the “operation notice” is executed, the connection is performed. As a production operation that becomes a part of the production E1 to the joint production E4, or as a separate production operation performed after the execution of the joint production E1 to the joint production E4, the operation of the operation button 30 is detected and a scene in which the bow and arrow pass. Subsequently, a predetermined character display may be performed, and a line of the displayed character may be notified as a message.

  As an example, in the notice effect control pattern with the effect control code STB1-2 or the effect control code STB2-2, after the end of the scene where the bow and arrow pass and the balloons fly away in the connection effect E1 or the connection effect E2, The message “Sorry !!” should be announced as a dialogue along with the display. On the other hand, in the notice effect control pattern with the effect control code STB3-2 or the effect control code STB4-2, after the end of the scene in which the bow and arrow pass and the balloon bursts in the connection effect E3 or the connection effect E4, The message “I did it !!” should be announced as a line with the display.

  In this way, in the notice effect in which the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are combined, for example, as in the case of displaying an effect image in which a balloon appears, only the continuous notice effect is executed and the single notice effect is not executed. For example, an effect operation is common to a case where only a single notice effect is executed and a continuous notice effect is not executed, such as a display of an effect image through which a bow and arrow passes in response to detection of an operation of the operation button 30, for example There is a sequence of special performance actions when the combination of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect, such as the display of the effect image that flies away, the effect image that the balloon bursts, and the display of the character including message notification. Alternatively, it may be executed in parallel. Alternatively, when only the continuous notice effect is performed and when the common effect operation is performed, and when only the single notice effect is performed and the common effect operation is executed sequentially or in parallel, When the notice effect is combined, the specific effect operation may not be executed.

  In the setting example of the notice effect control pattern table 171 shown in FIG. 14B, one notice effect control pattern is prepared for each of a plurality of notice patterns. On the other hand, a plurality of types of notice effect control patterns may be prepared corresponding to one notice pattern. As an example, regarding the notice pattern YPB1 to notice pattern YPB4 for executing the single notice effect of “operation notice”, the presence / absence of a join effect, the contents of the join effect, etc. (the number of balloons displayed) In order to execute different presentation operations depending on whether the balloons fly away or burst, character display, presence / absence of message notification, etc., a plurality of types of notice presentation control patterns may be prepared in advance. Alternatively, for example, an effect image in which a bow and arrow passes in response to detection of an operation of the operation button 30 may be used as the notice effect control patterns corresponding to the notice patterns YPB1 to YPB4 for executing the single notice effect of “operation notice”. Prepare a notice effect control pattern to execute a common effect operation when only a single notice effect such as display is executed and a continuous notice effect is not executed, and when a continuous notice effect and a single notice effect are executed in combination. Further, for example, when a combination of a continuous notice effect and a single notice effect such as a display of an effect image in which balloons fly away, a display of an effect image in which balloons burst, or a character including a message is executed in combination. A notice effect control pattern for executing a connection effect or the like may be prepared separately.

  FIG. 15A shows a configuration example of various effect control patterns such as a symbol variation control pattern and a notice effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 15A, the effect control pattern is derived from process data including, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, an end code, and the like. It is configured.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of the production operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of the presentation control, etc. may be set corresponding to the predetermined control content and processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation operation period using the operation button 30 such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation button 30 and data for specifying the control content of the operation when the operation is detected. Is included. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, or process data configured to include a part of these. Furthermore, other various control data such as, for example, production model control data indicating an operation mode in the movable member included in the production model may be included.

  FIG. 15B shows various rendering operations executed according to the content of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to flash a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to accept the operation on the operation button 30 in the operation valid period specified by the detection control data and determine the content of the effect. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that is not a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the light emitter such as 9) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of a continuous notice start determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, a continuous notice start determination table 140A shown in FIG. 16 (A) and a continuous notice start determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16 (B) are prepared in advance as continuous notice start determination tables. The continuous notice start determination table 140 </ b> A is used when the winning display determination that the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small win” at the time of starting winning, or the determination that the specific variation pattern is determined is made. Is a table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the continuous notice start. The continuous notice start determination table 140B is based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the continuous notice start and the like in correspondence with the case where the determination per winning time or the determination that the specific variation pattern is determined is not made. It is a table referred in order to determine whether to perform a notice effect.

  In the continuous notice start determination table 140A, various flags such as a specific pattern flag at the time of winning is turned on (specific pattern flag at the time of winning a prize) and a determination flag per winning time is turned on (determination flag per winning time is determined). This is a result of determining whether or not to start the execution of the continuous notice effect, such as the start of the continuous notice effect starting the execution of the continuous notice effect or the absence of the continuous notice start not starting the execution of the continuous notice effect depending on the state. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the continuous notice start is assigned to the presence / absence of the continuous notice start. Here, the determination result that the specific pattern flag at the time of winning is determined to be a specific variation pattern (variation pattern with super reach) at the time of starting winning by the first starting port winning designation command or the second starting port winning designation command Is set to the ON state when notified. The winning determination flag is notified of the determination result that the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” at the time of starting winning by the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command. Is set to the on state.

  In the setting example of the continuous notice start determination table 140A shown in FIG. 16A, the result of determining whether or not the continuous notice is started depends on whether the winning specific pattern flag is on or the winning time determination flag is on. The decision value assignments for are different. For example, when the winning determination flag is on, more determination values are assigned to the determination result with the start of continuous notice than when the winning specific pattern flag is on. Thus, when the winning time determination is made, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be started at a higher rate than when the determination that the specific variation pattern is determined is made.

  It should be noted that not only whether the winning specific pattern flag is ON or whether the winning time determination flag is ON, for example, a continuous notice determination buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 (see FIG. 20), etc. Accordingly, the assignment of the decision value to the decision result of the presence / absence of the continuous notice start may be different. Here, the continuous notice determination buffer value is determined when a winning time determination or a determination within a specific pattern common range is notified by the first starting opening prize specifying command or the second starting opening prize specifying command. The number of variable displays executed before the variable display based on the stored storage information is executed (including the variable display based on the stored storage information) is set, and it is determined that the execution of the continuous notice effect is started. Or until the buffer value becomes “0”, it is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time variable display is started. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a continuous notice effect over two to four variable displays, with different ratios depending on whether the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2” to “4”. It may be determined whether or not to start execution of the continuous notice effect. As an example, when the continuous notice determination buffer value is “3”, it is determined that there is a continuous notice start rate at a higher rate than when the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2”. If the decision value is assigned so that the continuous notice determination buffer value is “4” and the continuous notice determination buffer value is “4”, so that the decision is made with the start of the continuous notice at a higher rate than when the buffer value is “3”. Good.

  In the continuous notice start determination table 140B, the random number value for determining the continuous notice start is determined based on whether the special figure holding storage number is “1”, “2”, or “3” or more, with respect to the presence / absence of the continuous notice start. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with SR1-1 is assigned. Here, the special figure hold memory number is, for example, the first special figure or the second special figure corresponding to the first special figure or the second special figure for which variable display is started in the special figure game (the first special figure hold memory number or the second special figure). (The number of reserved memories) or the total number of reserved memories obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. Alternatively, the total reserved memory number may be used when the special figure game using the second special figure is started, while the first special figure reserved memory number may be used when the special figure game using the first special figure is started. .

  In the setting example of the continuous notice start determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16 (B), the assignment of the decision value to the determination result of the presence / absence of the continuous notice start is different depending on the number of special figure hold storage, but there is a continuous notice start. The determination value assigned to the determination result is set so as to be significantly smaller than when the winning specific pattern flag is turned on or when the winning determination flag is turned on in the continuous notice start determination table 140A. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the degree of expectation that variable display with a specific variation pattern is executed, and the like can be increased. it can.

  In the setting example of the continuous notice start determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16 (B), when the special figure holding storage number is “2”, a larger number of decision values than when it is “3” or more are displayed. Assigned to certain decision results. On the other hand, as the number of special figure reservations increases, more determination values may be assigned to the determination result with the start of continuous notice. However, if it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is started every time the variable display is started, if the number of special figure hold storage is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, until the number decreases to the predetermined number, It is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is started when the variable display is started each time. As an example, in the case where the special figure reserved memory number specified in the continuous notice start determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B is the total reserved memory number, in this embodiment, continuous display is performed over 2 to 4 variable displays. Since the notice effect can be executed, if the total number of reserved memories is within the range of “3” to “8”, the continuous notice effect is provided at a determined ratio corresponding to the case where “3” or more is displayed each time variable display is started. It is determined whether or not to start execution. Therefore, even if it is set so that the execution of the continuous notice effect is started at a higher rate when the total number of reserved storage is “2” than when it is “3” or more, “3” If the cases described above are compared in a lump, it can be set so that the execution of the continuous notice effect is started at a higher rate than when “2”.

  FIG. 17 shows a configuration example of the continuous notice pattern determination table 141 stored in the ROM 121. The continuous notice pattern determination table 141 shown in FIG. 17A is a random notice value SR1 for determining a continuous notice pattern indicating a continuous notice pattern indicating the contents (effect form) of a continuous notice effect executed over a plurality of variable displays. 2 is a table referred to for determination based on numerical data indicating -2. The continuous notice pattern determination table 141 is compared with the random number value SR1-2 for determining the continuous notice pattern according to the flag state such as the determination flag on per winning time or the specific pattern flag on condition when winning, or the continuous notice determination buffer value. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned to the continuous notice pattern.

  FIG. 17B shows a configuration example of each continuous notice pattern determined using the continuous notice pattern determination table 141 shown in FIG. In each continuous notice pattern, the notice pattern YP1-1, the notice pattern YP1-2, and the notice pattern YP2 are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to any of the consecutive notice remaining number count values “1” to “4”. −1, the notice pattern YP3-1, and the notice pattern are combined so that the notice effect by the notice pattern YP4-1 is executed. Here, the continuous notice remaining number count value indicates the remaining number of continuous notice effects executed over a plurality of variable displays, and each time the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to one special figure game ends, Updated to be subtracted.

  In the setting example of the continuous notice pattern determination table 141 shown in FIG. 17A, the continuous notice pattern corresponding to the variable display count larger than the variable display execution count specified by the continuous notice determination buffer value is determined. is there. For example, a determination value is assigned to the continuous notice pattern YRA3-1 in accordance with a case where the winning determination flag is ON and the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2”. As shown in FIG. 17B, the continuous notice pattern YRA3-1 is combined with the notice pattern corresponding to the continuous notice remaining number count value “1” to “3”, and is continuous over three variable displays. A notice effect can be executed. On the other hand, when the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2”, it is designated to execute the continuous notice effect over two variable displays.

  As described above, when the continuous notice pattern corresponding to the variable display count larger than the number of executions of the variable display specified by the continuous notice determination buffer value is determined, for example, the variable display (continuous notice determination buffer to be noticed) is selected. In the variable display that has reached the number of executions corresponding to the value), it was decided to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect on the side of the effect control board 12 and corresponded to a plurality of notice patterns before and after the pseudo-continuous change. An effect operation included in the continuous notice effect may be executed. For example, when the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2”, when the continuous notice pattern YRA3-1 for executing the continuous notice effect over three variable displays is determined, the second variable is determined. In the display, a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, and at the time of the first change before the pseudo-continuous change is executed, the effect of the notice pattern YPA2-1 (corresponding to the continuous notice remaining count value “2”) After performing the notice effect, the notice effect is performed with the effect of the notice pattern YPA1-1 (corresponding to the count number of remaining notices of continuous notice corresponding to “1”) during the fluctuation display after the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed. That's fine. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is to execute a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the pseudo-continuous variation according to the variation pattern is used to respond to the remaining number of continuous notice effects. The notice effect by the notice pattern may be executed.

  In the setting example of the continuous notice pattern determination table 141 shown in FIG. 17A, the determination is made so that the ratio determined for each continuous notice pattern differs depending on the flag state even if the continuous notice determination buffer value is the same. There is a part where a value is assigned to each continuous notice pattern. For example, when the determination flag per winning time is on, the continuous notice pattern YRA2-1 becomes the use pattern when the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2” at a higher rate than when the specific pattern flag is won. As determined, a decision value is assigned. In addition, in the continuous notice pattern determination table 141, there is a part in which the decision value is assigned to a different continuous notice pattern depending on the flag state even if the continuous notice determination buffer value is the same. For example, when the winning time determination flag is ON, when the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2”, no determination value is assigned to the continuous notice pattern YRA2-2 or the continuous notice pattern YRA3-2. These continuous notice patterns are never determined. On the other hand, when the winning specific pattern flag is ON, when the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2”, the determined value is also given to the continuous notice pattern YRA2-2 and the continuous notice pattern YRA3-2. Assigned and may be determined by these continuous notice patterns. With these settings, the degree of expectation that the special figure display result will be “big hit” or “small hit” depending on the content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice pattern (effect mode), or variable depending on the specific fluctuation pattern The degree of expectation that the display is executed can be varied.

  In the setting example of the continuous notice pattern determination table 141 shown in FIG. 17A, any of the continuous notice pattern YRA2-1, the continuous notice pattern YRA3-1, and the continuous notice pattern YRA4-1 when the winning time determination flag is on. On the other hand, the continuous notice pattern YRA2-2, the continuous notice pattern YRA3-2, and the continuous notice pattern YRA4-2 are not decided. On the other hand, when the winning special pattern flag is ON, it may be determined as any continuous notice pattern. In addition, when neither the winning determination flag is turned on nor the winning specific pattern flag is turned on, and both flags are off, the continuous notice pattern YRA2-2, the continuous notice pattern YRA3-2, the continuous notice pattern While it is determined as one of YRA4-2, it is not determined as continuous notice pattern YRA2-1, continuous notice pattern YRA3-1, or continuous notice pattern YRA4-1. Therefore, when the continuous notice effect is executed by any one of the continuous notice pattern YRA2-1, the continuous notice pattern YRA3-1, and the continuous notice pattern YRA4-1, the variable display result can be “big hit” or “small hit”. Therefore, even when the variable display result is “lost”, variable display using a specific variation pattern is executed. On the other hand, when the continuous notice effect by any one of the continuous notice pattern YRA2-2, the continuous notice pattern YRA3-2, and the continuous notice pattern YRA4-2 is executed, the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. There is only a possibility that variable display with a specific variation pattern is executed.

  On the other hand, even when the continuous notice effect is executed by any one of the continuous notice pattern YRA2-2, the continuous notice pattern YRA3-2, and the continuous notice pattern YRA4-2, the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The decision value may be assigned so that it may become. Even when the continuous notice effect is executed by any one of the continuous notice pattern YRA2-1, the continuous notice pattern YRA3-1, and the continuous notice pattern YRA4-1, the variable display result is “losing” and the variable according to the specific fluctuation pattern. A determined value may be assigned so that the display may not be executed.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the single notice type determination table 142 stored in the ROM 121. The single notice type determination table 142 shown in FIG. 18 (A) determines whether or not to execute the single notice effect, and whether the single notice type that is the notice pattern type in the case of execution is selected from among a plurality of types. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on numerical data etc. which show random number SR2-1 for single notice classification determination. In the single notice type determination table 142, the single notice type is determined according to whether the continuous notice execution flag is on or off, and whether the special figure display result is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR2-1 for determining the single notice type is assigned to the single notice type such as no notice, single notice CTY1 or single notice CTY2. The continuous notice execution flag is set to the on state when the execution of the continuous notice effect is started, and is cleared and turned off in response to the end of the execution of the continuous notice effect.

  FIG. 18B shows the contents of the effect in the single notice effect corresponding to each single notice type of the single notice CTY1 and the single notice CTY2. Here, the single notice type of the single notice CTY1 includes a notice pattern for executing the single notice effect of “effect image display”, while the single notice type of the single notice CTY2 includes “notice during operation”. A notice pattern for executing a single notice effect is included.

  In the setting example of the single notice type determination table 142 shown in FIG. 18A, even if the state of the continuous notice execution flag (off / on) is the same, the special figure display results are “lost”, “small hit”, Depending on which of the “big hits”, there is no single notice or the assignment of the decision value to each single notice type is different. For example, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the single notice CTY1 or the single notice is given when the continuous notice execution flag is off at a higher rate than when the special figure display result is “losing”. A determined value is assigned so as to be determined as the single notice type of CTY2. Therefore, it is possible to vary the feeling of expectation that the special figure display result is “big hit” depending on whether or not the single notice effect is executed.

  In addition, in the single notice type determination table 142, even if the special figure display results are the same, there is no single notice or the decision value for each single notice type depending on whether the continuous notice execution flag is off or on. There are parts with different assignments. For example, even if the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”, if the continuous notice execution flag is on, it will be a single notice rather than if the continuous notice execution flag is off. The decision value is assigned so that the ratio determined without is low. In this setting example, in the variable display where the continuous notice effect is executed, the possibility that the single notice effect is executed is higher than the variable display where the continuous notice effect is not executed, and the single notice effect is executed in combination with the continuous notice effect. It becomes easy to be done. For example, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the continuous notice execution flag is on, the ratio determined without a single notice is higher than when the continuous notice execution flag is off. A decision value may be assigned. In this case, only when the special figure display result is “small hit” or “big hit”, the possibility that the single notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the continuous notice effect is executed is increased. Therefore, when the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are executed in combination, the degree of expectation (reliability) that the special figure display result is “small hit” or “big hit” compared to when only the continuous notice effect is executed. Degree) is increased. Furthermore, in the single notice type determination table 142, even if the special figure display results are the same, the decision values are assigned to different single notice types depending on whether the continuous notice execution flag is off or on. There is a part. That is, when the continuous notice execution flag is off, the determined value is also assigned to the single notice type of the single notice CTY1, while when the continuous notice execution flag is on, the single notice CTY1 No decision value is assigned to the single notice type. Therefore, when the continuous notice execution flag is on, it is determined that there is no single notice or the single notice type of the single notice CTY2. With such a setting, when a single notice effect is executed in combination with a variable display in which a continuous notice effect is executed, only the single notice effect of “operation notice” can be executed, and the “effect image display” can be executed alone. The notice effect is not executed.

  In the setting example of the single notice type determination table 142 shown in FIG. 18A, the assignment of the decision value to the decision result of the single notice type differs depending on the state of the continuous notice execution flag. On the other hand, when the continuous notice execution flag is on, whether or not the single notice effect is executed by changing the assignment of the decision value to the decision result of the single notice type according to the continuous notice pattern used. The determination ratio and the determination ratio of each individual notice type may be different. In this case, when the continuous notice effect is executed, the ratio of executing the single notice effect in combination according to the contents of the effect (effect mode), or the single notice type when the single notice effect is executed. The rate of determination can be made different.

  Alternatively, when the continuous notice execution flag is on, the determination ratio for determining whether or not the single notice effect is executed by changing the assignment of the decision value to the decision result of the single notice type according to the continuous notice remaining count value Alternatively, the determination ratio of each single notice type may be different. In this case, when the continuous notice effect is executed, the ratio of executing the single notice effect or the single notice effect is executed according to the remaining number of variable displays for which the continuous notice effect is executed. It is possible to vary the determination ratio of the single notice type in the case of

  Alternatively, when the continuous notice execution flag is on, the result of determination of the single notice type according to the flag state when the execution of the continuous notice effect is started (such as a winning time determination flag on or a winning specific pattern flag on). It is also possible to make different allocations of decision values for and to determine the decision rate for determining whether or not the single notice effect is executed and the decision ratio for each individual notice type. In this case, when the continuous notice effect is executed, whether or not the variable display result becomes “small hit” or “big hit” in the variable display subject to the notice by the continuous notice effect, or a specific fluctuation Depending on whether or not variable display based on the pattern is executed, the ratio of executing the combination of the single advance notice effects and the determination ratio of the single notice type when the single advance notice effect is executed can be varied.

  Further, in the setting example of the single notice type determination table 142 shown in FIG. 18A, the assignment of the decision value to the single notice type determination result is varied according to the special figure display result. On the other hand, according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the decision value allocation to the decision result of the single notice type is changed, and the decision ratio of whether or not the single notice effect is executed and each individual decision The determination ratio of the notice type may be varied. In this case, according to the display contents (display mode) of variable display by the variation pattern, the ratio of executing the single notice effect and the determination ratio of the single notice type when the single notice effect is executed are varied. be able to. In addition, the possibility that variable display with a specific variation pattern is executed is changed according to whether or not a single notice effect is executed, and depending on the type of the single notice (the content of the notice effect) when executed. Can do.

  FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of a single notice pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as a single notice pattern determination table, a single notice pattern determination table 143A shown in FIG. 19A and a single notice pattern determination table 143B shown in FIG. 19B are prepared in advance. The single notice pattern determination table 143A is a numerical value indicating a random number value SR2-2 for determining a single notice pattern as a notice pattern used to execute a single notice effect when the single notice type of the single notice CTY1 is decided. It is a table that is referred to for determination based on data or the like. The single notice pattern determination table 143B is a numerical value indicating the random number value SR2-2 for determining the single notice pattern as a notice pattern used to execute the single notice effect when the single notice type of the single notice CTY2 is decided. It is a table that is referred to for determination based on data or the like.

  In the single notice pattern determination table 143A, the notice pattern YPA1- included in the single notice type of “effect image display” is selected depending on whether the special figure display result is “losing”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. 1. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number SR2-2 for determining a single notice pattern is assigned to the notice pattern YPA1-2, the notice pattern YPA2-1, the notice pattern YPA3-1, and the notice pattern YPA4-1. It has been. In the single notice pattern determination table 143B, the notice patterns YPB1 to YPB1 included in the single notice type of “operation notice” are selected depending on whether the special figure display result is “losing”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR2-2 for determining the single notice pattern is assigned to the notice pattern YPB4.

  In the setting examples of the single notice pattern determination tables 143A and 143B shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, depending on whether the special figure display result is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. The assignment of the decision value to each notice pattern is different. With such a setting, the expectation or the like that the variable display result becomes “big hit” can be varied according to the content of the effect (effect mode) in the single notice effect. In the single notice pattern determination table 143B, even if the special figure display results are the same, the assignment of the decision value to each notice pattern is varied depending on whether the continuous notice execution flag is off or on. The ratio determined for each notice pattern may be different. This makes it possible to vary the expectation that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on whether or not it is executed in combination with the continuous notice effect as well as the effect content (effect mode) of the single notice effect. it can. In addition, in the single notice pattern determination table 143B, when the continuous notice execution flag is on, even if the special figure display result is the same, the assigned value for each notice pattern is assigned according to the remaining notice number of consecutive notices count value. The ratio determined for each notice pattern may be made different. Thereby, according to the remaining number of times of variable display in which the continuous notice effect is executed, the appearance ratio of the effect content (effect mode) in the single notice effect executed in combination with the continuous notice effect is changed, and the variable display result Can gradually increase the sense of expectation that will become a “big hit”.

  Alternatively, in the single notice pattern determination table 143B, when the continuous notice execution flag is on and the single notice effect is executed together with the continuous notice effect, the decision value for each notice pattern is used according to the continuous notice pattern used. The allocation may be made different, and the determination ratio of each notice pattern may be made different. In this case, when the continuous notice effect is executed, the determination ratio of the effect contents (effect form) in the single notice effect executed together with the continuous notice effect is different according to the effect content (effect mode). Can be made. Alternatively, in the single notice pattern determination tables 143A and 143B, the assignment of the decision value to each notice pattern may be made different according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command, and the decision ratio of each notice pattern may be made different. . In this case, according to the display content (display mode) of the variable display by the variation pattern, the determination ratio of the effect content (effect mode) in the single notice effect can be varied.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 20, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 20 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 121 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31, and the effect. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the control board 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 21 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 21 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). 23 and 24 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first reads out input port data stored in a predetermined input port register (step S201 in FIG. 23). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating an input state of an external signal at an input port included in the I / O 105 is stored. In this embodiment, the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / ON) of the first start winning signal that becomes the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 22A. ) And the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / OFF) of the second start winning signal that becomes the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B. ON).

  It is determined whether or not the bit value [1] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S202). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, Update so as to count up by adding 1 (step S203). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S202 (step S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S204).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S204, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S205). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the first starting winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, It is updated so as to count up by adding 1 (step S206). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S205 (step S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S207).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S206 and S207, it is determined whether or not the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, “2”) predetermined as a winning determination value. (Step S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S208; Yes), the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S209). Further, the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in step S208 (step S208; No), a valid game ball winning in the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A. In response to this, it is determined whether or not the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value does not reach the winning determination value (step S211; No), a valid game ball winning to the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B. In response to the absence, the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S212). Further, the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S213).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S210 and S213, the CPU 103 reads the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S214). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S215 in FIG. 24). At this time, if the read value in step S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 23 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value. The first start condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the one special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established. When it is determined in step S211 shown in FIG. 23 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value and then it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, The second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the 2 special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S216). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1. When the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure reserved memory number count value is increased. Add one. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter indicating the total reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. (Step S217). The CPU 103 also selects, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type. Numerical data indicating MR3 is extracted (step S218). Numeric data indicating each random number extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, thereby storing each random value (step S219). . For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After storing the random number value in step S219, the winning specific pattern determination process is executed (step S220). Subsequently, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  When the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; Yes), after executing the process of step S221, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S222). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S222; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S223), and then FIG. The process proceeds to step S211 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (step S222; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S224). The start winning determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when both of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of a game ball that is effective at the same time, both processes are executed by processing executed within 2 milliseconds. A process based on the fact that the switch has detected a start winning of a valid game ball is executed. That is, when it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 23 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing of steps S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. After executing the processing of steps S215 to S221 shown in FIG. 23, in response to the fact that the start port buffer value is “1” in step S222, the processing of step S223 is executed, and then in step S211 shown in FIG. Proceed to processing. And when it determines with the 2nd start winning determination count value having reached the winning determination value in step S211, after performing the process of step S212-S214 shown in FIG. 21, step S215-S221 shown in FIG. After executing the above process, the process of step S224 is executed in response to the start port buffer value being “2” in step S222, and then the start winning determination process is terminated. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the winning random number determination process executed in step S220 of FIG. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is displayed as “big hit” or “small hit” in the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 22, FIG. 27) described later. ”Or a jackpot type is determined. In a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 22 and FIG. 28) described later, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined. . On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning specific pattern determination process in step S220 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Thus, it is specified in advance whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and whether or not the decorative pattern variation pattern is at least a variation pattern with super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, the special figure display result becomes “big hit” or “small hit”, and the reach of super reach is reached. It is predicted that an effect will be executed, and based on this prediction result, it is determined on the effect control board 12 side whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed over a plurality of variable displays by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. it can.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 103 first determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S401). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (step S401; “1”), it is determined whether or not the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit that is a big hit gaming state (step S401). S402). For example, in the process of step S402, if the value of the special figure process flag is any of “4” to “7”, the CPU 103 may determine that a big hit is being made.

  When it is determined in step S402 that the jackpot is not being hit (step S402; No), it is determined whether or not the time-shortening control is being performed in which the time-shortening control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time-shortening state (step S403). For example, in the process of step S403, the CPU 103 may check the state of the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and determine that the time reduction control is being performed if the time reduction flag is on. When it is determined in step S402 that it is a big hit (step S402; Yes), or in the case where it is determined in step S403 that a time reduction control is being executed (step S403; Yes), a big hit / short / short win is notified. After setting for transmitting the command B103H (see FIG. 4C) as the first start opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 (step S404), at the time of winning The random value determination process ends. In response to the first start opening winning designation command for notifying such a big hit / short / short win, the production control board 12 sets the first special figure reserved storage number in the start winning storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image that can be specified can be updated, and among the stored storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure, there is one based on the start winning during the big hit or the short-time control Can be specified if included.

  When it is determined in step S403 that the time-saving control is not being performed (step S403; No), the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S218 in FIG. It is determined whether it is within the range (step S405). For example, in the process of step S405, the special figure display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 8 is selected and set in the usage table. Here, when setting to the use table, for example, the storage address (head address) of the table data in the ROM 101 may be set to a table pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Subsequently, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in the use table, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 extracted in step S218 is “big hit”. The More specifically, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is compared with the determined value stored in the special figure display result determination table 130, and the special figure display to which the determined value matching the random value MR1 is assigned. It is determined whether or not the result is a “big hit”. Here, if the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short time state, the special figure display result determination table 130 refers to table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is a normal state or a short time state. It is determined whether or not the figure display result is “big hit”, and if it is a probability change state, the special figure display result determination table 130 refers to the table data corresponding to the case where the game state is the probability change state. It is determined whether or not the display result is a “big hit”. Regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” with reference to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state in the special figure display result determination table 130. It may be determined whether or not.

  When it is determined in step S405 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S405; No), it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range (step S406). When it is determined in step S405 that the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination range (step S405; Yes), or when the random value MR1 is determined to be within the small hit determination range in step S406 ( Step S406; Yes), a command B102H serving as a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that a winning time determination has been made based on detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening (FIG. 4 ( C)) is set for transmission from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S407), and the random number determination process at the time of winning is completed. By means of the first start opening prize designation command for notifying the winning time per hour determination, the production control board 12 can specify the first special figure reserved memory number in the start prize memory display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image can be updated, and the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” in the stored storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure. It can be specified that what is indicated is included.

  In addition, the winning time determination shown in the first start opening winning designation command is notified only when the special figure display result is “big hit”, and is not notified when the special figure display result is “small hit”. You may do it. In this case, if the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination range in step S405, the process proceeds to step S407. If the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in step S406, the process proceeds to step S410 described later. What is necessary is just to advance to a process etc. Alternatively, the winning time per hour determination indicated in the first start opening winning designation command is notified only when the special figure display result is “big hit” and “non-probable change” or “probable change” big hit type, The notification may not be made when the big hit type is obtained or when the special figure display result is “small hit”. In this case, if the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step S405, it is further determined whether or not the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is within the determination range of “non-probable change” or “probability change”. If it is within the determination range, the process proceeds to step S407. On the other hand, if it is within the determination range of “probability”, or if the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in step S406, step S410 is performed. It is sufficient to proceed to the process.

  When it is determined in step S406 that the random value MR1 is not within the small hit determination range (step S406; No), numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S218 of FIG. Is within the specific pattern common range (step S408). Here, in the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 10C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, if the random value MR3 for determining the special figure variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, a variation pattern involving at least super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is present. The included variation pattern types CA2-4 are determined. Therefore, in the process of step S408, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it may be determined that it is within the specific pattern common range.

  If it is determined in step S408 that the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range (step S408; Yes), the random pattern MR3 is within the specific pattern common range based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. Is set to transmit a command B101H (refer to FIG. 4C), which is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step) S409), the winning random number determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S408 that the random number MR3 is not within the specific pattern common range (step S408; No), based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening. A setting for transmitting from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 a command B100H (see FIG. 4C), which is a first start opening winning designation command notifying that it is outside the specific pattern common range. After that (step S410), the winning random number determination process is terminated. In response to the first start opening prize designation command for notifying whether or not the specific pattern is within the common range, the effect control board 12 side stores the first special figure hold memory in the start prize storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image that can specify the number can be updated. In addition, it is possible to specify whether or not the on-hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure includes information indicating that the specific fluctuation pattern is determined.

  When it is determined in step S401 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S401; “2”), the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S218 of FIG. 24 is shown. It is determined whether or not the numerical data is within the big hit determination range (step S411). At this time, when it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S411; No), it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range (step S412). When it is determined in step S411 that it is within the big hit determination range (step S411; Yes), or when it is determined in step S412 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S412; Yes), the second start winning prize A command B202H (see FIG. 4C) serving as a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that a winning time determination has been made based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) through the mouth is sent to the main board 11 Is set for transmission to the effect control board 12 (step S413), and the winning random number determination process is terminated. With the second start opening prize designation command for notifying the winning time per hour determination, the production control board 12 can specify the second special figure reserved memory number in the start prize memory display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image can be updated, and the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” in the hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure. It can be specified that what is indicated is included.

  Note that the winning time determination shown in the second start opening winning designation command is notified only when the special figure display result is “big hit”, and is not notified when the special figure display result is “small win”. You may do it. In this case, if the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination range in step S411, the process proceeds to step S413. If the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in step S412, the process proceeds to step S416 described later. It is sufficient to proceed to processing. Alternatively, the winning time per hour determination shown in the second start opening winning designation command is notified only when the special figure display result is “big hit” and “non-probable change” or “probable change” big hit type. The notification may not be made when the big hit type is obtained or when the special figure display result is “small hit”. In this case, if the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step S411, it is further determined whether or not the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is within the determination range of “non-probable change” or “probability change”. If it is within the determination range, the process proceeds to step S413. On the other hand, if it is within the determination range of “probability” or if the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in step S412, step S416 is performed. It is sufficient to proceed to the process.

  When it is determined in step S412 that the random number MR1 is not within the small hit determination range (step S412; No), numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S218 of FIG. Is within the specific pattern common range (step S414). At this time, similarly to the processing in step S408, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it may be determined that it is within the specific pattern common range.

  When it is determined in step S414 that the random number MR3 is within the specific pattern common range (step S414; Yes), the random pattern MR3 is within the specific pattern common range based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. Is set to transmit the command B201H (see FIG. 4C), which is the second start opening winning designation command for notifying that, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step) S415), the winning random number determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S414 that the random number MR3 is not within the specific pattern common range (step S414; No), based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. A setting for transmitting a command B200H (see FIG. 4C), which is a second start opening winning designation command notifying that it is outside the specific pattern common range, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 After performing (step S416), the winning random number determination process is terminated. By the second start opening winning designation command for notifying whether or not it is within the specific pattern common range, on the side of the effect control board 12, the second special figure hold memory is stored in the start winning storage display area 5H of the image display device 5. The display of the effect image that can specify the number can be updated. In addition, it is possible to specify whether or not the on-hold storage information corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure includes information indicating that the specific fluctuation pattern is determined.

  When the winning random number determination process as described above is executed, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected (at the time of the first start winning or second Whether the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the special figure holding memory number which is the holding memory number of the special figure game. Whether or not a specific variation pattern with super reach is determined is determined, and the first start opening prize specifying command and the second starting opening prize specifying command which differ depending on the determination results are 11 to the effect control board 12 can be transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 performs one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 in accordance with the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Select and execute.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the result of determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, Corresponding to the determination result of the pattern type, processing for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B in the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. When the big hit flag is on, the special process flag value is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big prize opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to 15 rounds big hit state corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. In addition to the setting, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “15 times”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to be “surprise” and is controlled to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. At the same time, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “2 times”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, a process for performing a setting for transmitting an end designation command is included.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses and processing that performs various settings for controlling to a probable change state and a short time state corresponding to the jackpot type are included.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”, and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which a presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0”. (Step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, the second special figure reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second special figure hold memory count value by one, the second special figure hold memory number is updated to be subtracted by one, and the second special figure hold memory number is reserved. Reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the retention number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the retention numbers “2” to “4”) in the storage unit 151B are placed one entry higher. Shift (step S233). At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), the first special figure reserved memory number that is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is “ It is determined whether it is “0” (step S235). For example, in the process of step S235, the first special figure reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”. At this time, if the first special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S235; Yes), the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure is not satisfied. Then, the special symbol normal process is terminated. Thus, in the process of step S235, when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. Determine. Therefore, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the storage corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, the first special figure hold memory count value is decremented by 1 and updated to update the first special figure hold memory number to 1 and the first special figure hold memory count is Reservation data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the retention number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the retention numbers “2” to “4”) in the storage unit 151A are placed one entry higher Shift (step S237). At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, it is determined whether to display the special figure variable display result, which is the variable symbol display result, as “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. As the usage table, the special figure display result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S239). The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is “big hit” or “small”. Whether to display the special figure display result as "big hit", "small hit", or "lose" depending on which of the decision values assigned to each special figure display result of "Bon" or "Lose" Is determined (step S240). At this time, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is “big hit” (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the big hit type determination random value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type is matched, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S244). Here, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S234, the decision value is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type decision table 131. Therefore, the jackpot type is not determined as “surprising”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot game state is set (step S248). As an example, if it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, the result is a lost pattern corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. When it is determined in step S241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” are determined according to the big hit type determination result in step S244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”, the special symbol indicating the number of the big hit symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the first special figure holding storage number is “0” in step S235, after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol normal process is terminated. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 28, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S262). ). Further, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S263). ).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types ( Step S265).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S264 (step S264; No), it is determined whether or not a predetermined variation time reduction condition is satisfied (step S266). Here, the variable time shortening condition is, for example, that the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on and the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being executed, and the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number ( For example, “3”) or more may be used as long as it is determined in advance in order to shorten the special figure fluctuation time from the normal time. Even when the time reduction flag is on, the variable time reduction condition is satisfied if the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, whereas the variable time reduction condition is not satisfied if the total number of stored memories is less than the predetermined number. You may do it.

  When the variation time shortening condition is not satisfied in step S266 (step S266; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. ) 132C is selected and set (step S267). On the other hand, when the variation time shortening condition is satisfied (step S266; Yes), the loss variation pattern type determination table (shortening) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 132D is selected and set (step S268). Note that a plurality of types of shortening variation pattern type determination tables for shortening may be provided, and different tables may be selected depending on which of the plurality of types of variation time shortening conditions is satisfied.

  After executing any of the processes in steps S263, S265, S267, and S268, the usage table is updated based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the random number buffer for variation, for example. By referring to the set variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S269). Here, in the process of step S269, the variable pattern type determination is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like at the time of starting winning and stored as the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A or the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. A variation pattern type is determined based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3. Therefore, it is possible to match the determination result of whether or not it is within the range of the specific pattern common range at the time of start winning and the determination result of the variation pattern type by the process of step S269, and the specific pattern common range at the time of start winning In spite of being determined to be within the range, it is possible to prevent a variation pattern type different from a variation pattern type including a specific variation pattern with super reach from being determined. Also, based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first special symbol display device 4A determines the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol, or the second start Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, a common random counter, etc. Using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern type updated by the above, the common processing module can determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S269, the loss variation pattern determination table 133A and the hit variation pattern determination are performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “losing”, “big hit” or “small hit”. One of the tables 133B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S270). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S270 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S271). The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S271 is executed, or may be the first start prize. The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation memory together with the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted at the start winning time when the game ball that has passed (entered) through the mouth and the second start winning opening is detected. You may memorize | store as pending data in the part 151B.

  In the process of step S271, whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second starting condition, a common random Using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 that is used for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S271, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S269, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating a common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S271, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S272). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S273). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S273, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol change are performed (step S274). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. When such setting in step S274 is performed, every time the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 21 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. A gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. The game state designation command and the pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S275), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 29, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 152 is on (step S291). Here, the special figure fixed display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295 described later in response to the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure confirmation display flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; Yes), a setting for deriving and displaying a fixed special symbol is performed (step S292). At this time, a setting for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). Further, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step S294). For example, in the process of step S294, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the special figure confirmation display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state (step S295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. Thus, after the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, the special symbol process processing according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol fixed display time set in step S294 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure fixed display flag is on.

  If the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294 is read, and whether or not the timer value has become “0”. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. That's fine. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated to wait until the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a big hit start production waiting time (step S299). In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S300, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S301). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S302). For example, the processing in step S302 includes processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-shortening flag to turn it off, processing for clearing the time-shortening counter for counting the remaining number of special figure games executed in the time-shortening state, and the like. It only has to be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S303), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a small hit start production waiting time (step S305). Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result being “small hit” from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S307). Also, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step S308).

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S304 (step S304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S309). After performing either of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is to be terminated (step S310), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S310, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by subtracting 1 for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control in the time reduction state may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S310 may be ended. It should be noted that for the probability variation state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability variation flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the time reduction control even in the probability variation state, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result that the time reduction control ends. In this way, when the time reduction control is ended, the probability variation control may be terminated at the same time, so that the normal state may be obtained. For the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or further It may be continued until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed.

  In the process of step S310, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability variation control termination determination stored in the ROM 101 or the like in advance is performed. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is ended by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S310, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process of determining whether or not to end the probability variation control based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the probability variation control is determined (predetermined), for example, in step S240 shown in FIG. It may be executed before.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the post-hit opening post-processing in step S116 shown in FIG. 22, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. Set to the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0”, etc.). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322). , It is specified whether the big hit type is "non-probability change", "probability change", or "surprise change". At this time, it is determined whether or not the identified jackpot type is “uncertain change” (step S323).

  When it is determined in step S323 that the big hit type is “non-probable change” (step S323; Yes), a setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the short-time state is performed (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state to the time reduction counter Set to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit type is “probability change” or “probability” (step S323; No), setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the probability change state is performed (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state.

  It should be noted that settings may be made for controlling the probability variation state of different types depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “probability change” or the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “probability”. As an example, if the jackpot type is determined to be “probability change”, both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, the initial value of the time reduction count value is not set, and the special figure display result is It is set so that both the probability variation control and the time reduction control are continuously performed until the “big hit” is reached. On the other hand, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise accuracy”, both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time reduction count value is the same as in the case of being controlled to the time reduction state. The probability variation control is continuously performed until the special figure display result becomes “big hit”, while the time reduction control is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, “100”). You may set as follows. Alternatively, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise accuracy”, if the predetermined short-and-short-term accuracy flag is on, the setting for starting the short-time control is performed together with the probability variation control, while the short- and middle-range accuracy flag is off. If there is, a setting for starting only the probability variation control may be performed. Here, for example, when it is determined in step S298 shown in FIG. 29 that the big hit flag is on, the big hit type is “probable” and the short time flag is on. Corresponding to the control being performed, the on state may be set.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S16 of FIG. 21 as normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first executes a gate passage determination process (step S130). For example, in the gate passage determination process in step S130, it is determined whether the gate switch 21 is on based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and if it is off, the gate passage determination process ends. On the other hand, when the gate switch 21 is on, a general-purpose reserved storage count value indicating the number of general-purpose reserved storage, which is the number of reserved data stored in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151C, is previously set as a general-purpose reserved upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”). At this time, if the usual figure holding upper limit value has been reached, the passage of the current game ball at the passing gate is invalidated and the gate passing determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the usual figure hold upper limit value is not reached, for example, random numbers for updating the usual figure display result are selected from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5 is extracted. The numerical data indicating the random value MR5 extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151C, whereby the random value MR5 is stored. In this case, after updating so as to add 1 to the usual reserved memory number count value, the gate passage determination process is terminated.

  After executing the gate passage determination process of step S130, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S140 to S143 shown in FIG. 31 according to the value of the normal process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In the normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the general symbol hold storage unit 151C. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the universal figure storage unit 151C, the universal figure display result, which is a variable display result of the normal symbol in the usual figure game, is set to “per common figure” or “normal figure” After the general map display result determination process for determining whether to “miss” is performed, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “1”.

  In the general map display result determination process, a predetermined general map display result determination table is referred to based on numerical data indicating a random value MR5 for determining the general map display result included in the reserved data read from the general map storage unit 151C. The general map display result is determined. Here, in the common map display result determination table, when the time reduction flag is on, the ratio of the decision to make the general map display result “per map” is higher than when the time reduction flag is off. The decision value is assigned to the normal map display result. Thereby, in the special game state such as the probability change state and the short time state, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal game” than in the normal state, thereby forming the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state increases, and the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening.

  In the general map display result determination process, the general map change time corresponding to the general map display result is also determined. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the normal time fluctuation time is set to be shorter than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, in the special game state such as the probability variation state and the short time state, the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the regular game is shortened, and the variable display result of “per regular diagram” is derived and displayed. The interval is also shortened, and the frequency at which the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the expanded open state increases, and the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. Further, in the general map display result determination process, when the general map display result is “per normal map”, the tilt control time that is the time for the second start winning opening to be in the expanded open state or the number of times to be in the expanded open state A certain number of tilt control times may be set. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the tilt control time and the number of times of tilt control are set to be larger than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the time and number of times that the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state increases, so that the game ball easily passes (enters) the second start winning opening. . Note that the setting for setting the second start winning opening in the expanded open state may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S142 or the normal electric accessory actuating process in step S143.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to vary the normal symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the normal symbol is measured. Further, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached a predetermined normal time fluctuation time.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 stops the change of the normal symbol based on the elapse of the normal symbol change time, and the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). ) To make settings. The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S143 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece included in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is vertically aligned with the fact that the variable display result (the general map display result) in the normal game is “per normal map”. The setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the enlarged open state by moving from the position to the tilt position is performed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 32 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation in the rendering model, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data shown is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  In the command analysis process in step S74, for example, a start winning command process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33 may be executed. In the start winning command processing, when the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it may be within the winning range determination or specific pattern common range. It is determined whether or not notification has been given.

  In the start winning command process shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S151). For example, the effect control command received on the side of the effect control board 12 is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, and the effect control CPU 120 reads the command stored in the effect control command receiving buffer and stores the contents. It is only necessary that the received effect control command can be specified by checking.

  When it is determined in step S151 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S151; Yes), display update setting corresponding to the first starting opening winning is set (step S152). For example, in the process of step S152, one of the display parts corresponding to the first start winning opening that is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 A display setting for changing to blue display may be performed in accordance with the establishment of the first start condition by detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the 1 start winning opening.

  Following the processing of step S152, for example, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice determination buffer value, which is the stored value of the continuous notice determination buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, is “0” (step S153). Here, in the continuous advance notice determination buffer, when it is notified that the winning time per time determination or within the specific pattern common range, the total reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number after the start winning are set, If the execution of the continuous notice effect is not started, it is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the decorative symbol variable display is started corresponding to the start of the execution of the special game until the buffer value becomes “0”. Is done. Therefore, when the continuous notice determination buffer value is other than “0”, the variable storage in which the winning time determination is made or the variable display in which the determination is made within the specific pattern common range is included in the hold storage information.

  When the continuous notice determination buffer value is other than “0” in step S153 (step S153; No), the winning storage time determination or the determination within the common range of the specific pattern is made with respect to the stored storage information based on the start winning that has occurred previously. Therefore, the command processing at the start winning prize is finished. When the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0” in step S153 (step S153; Yes), for example, whether or not the winning time determination is notified by reading the EXT data in the first start opening winning designation command or the like. Is determined (step S154). At this time, if the winning time determination is notified (step S154; Yes), for example, the winning time determination flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to the on state (step S155).

  If the winning time determination is not notified in step S154 (step S154; No), it is determined whether it is notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S156). At this time, if it is not notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S156; No), the command process at the time of the start winning prize is ended. On the other hand, if it is notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S156; Yes), for example, the winning specific pattern flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to the on state ( Step S157).

  After either of the processes of steps S155 and S157 is executed, the total reserved storage number after the start winning is set as the continuous notice determination buffer value (step S158), and the start winning time command process is ended. Here, in this embodiment, since the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the total number of reserved memories in the process of step S158. Is set to the continuous notice determination buffer value to specify the number of variable displays that are executed before the variable display based on the pending storage information that has been determined per winning time or determined within the specific pattern common range is executed. Can do. The total reserved memory number only needs to be specified, for example, by reading the EXT data of the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11.

  When it is determined in step S151 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S151; No), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S159). At this time, if it is determined that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S159; No), the start winning command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S159; Yes), display update setting corresponding to the second starting opening winning is set (step S160). For example, in the process of step S160, one of the display parts corresponding to the second start winning opening that is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 The display setting for changing to red display may be performed in accordance with the establishment of the second start condition by detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the 2 start winning opening.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S160, whether or not the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0”, that is, determination of winning storage per hour or determination within the common range common to the reserved memory information based on the start winning that has occurred previously. It is determined whether or not has been made (step S161). At this time, if the continuous notice determination buffer value is other than “0” (step S161; No), the start winning command processing is terminated. In this embodiment, since the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first subject to be notified by the continuous notice effect. If the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the special game using the second special figure is executed before the special figure game using the special figure is started, a continuous notice is given. There will be a shift in the variable display that is subject to advance notice. Therefore, even when the continuous notice determination buffer value is other than “0” in the process of step S161, the stored storage information for which a winning time determination or a determination within a specific pattern common range has passed through the first start winning opening ( If it is based on the detection of a game ball that has entered, for example, the continuous notice determination buffer value may be cleared and initialized to “0” before proceeding to the process of step S162.

  When the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0” in step S161 (step S161; No), whether or not the winning time determination is notified, for example, by reading the EXT data in the second start opening winning designation command. Is determined (step SS162). At this time, if the winning time determination is notified (step S162; Yes), the winning time determination flag is set to the on state (step S163). On the other hand, if the winning time determination is not notified (step S162; No), it is determined whether it is notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S164). If it is not notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S164; No), the start winning command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is notified that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S164; Yes), the winning specific pattern flag is set to the on state (step S165).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S163 and S165, after setting the second special figure holding storage number after the start winning as the continuous notice determination buffer value (step S166), the start winning time command processing is ended. To do. Here, in this embodiment, since the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the second special figure is executed in the process of step S166. By setting the number of reserved memory to the continuous notice determination buffer value, the variable display count executed before the variable display based on the reserved memory information for which the winning time determination or the determination within the specific pattern common range is performed is executed. Can be identified. The second special figure reserved storage number only needs to be specified based on, for example, the difference between the reception number of the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the reception number of the second variation start command. More specifically, the second special figure reservation specific count value, which is the stored value of the second special figure reservation specific counter provided in the production control counter setting unit 193, is set to 1 every time the second start opening winning designation command is received. It is only necessary to update so as to add and update so that 1 is subtracted every time the second variation start command is received so that the second special figure pending storage number can be specified.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S75 of FIG. 32 as the effect control process. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. To do.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process determines whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received from the main board 11. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display effect setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display effect setting processing corresponds to the decoration on the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of symbols and other various effects, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative pattern. Processing for performing various effects control during variable display is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or by outputting a command or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect controls in the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or by outputting a command or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decorative LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 or decoration is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the LED for the game is executed. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the variable display effect setting processing shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S501). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S501; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S503). As an example, in the process of step S503, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of confirmed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S501 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S501; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S505). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit type is “surprise” or the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S505; Yes), the big hit type such as one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 is “ The combination of the finalized decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the case of “accuracy” or the special symbol display result of “small hit” is determined (step S506). As an example, corresponding to the case where any of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, The combination of the determined decorative design is determined. In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is sufficient to determine a combination of definite decorative symbols constituting any one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 by referring to the above. Further, when either the variation pattern PC1-4 or the variation pattern PC1-5 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same process as in step S504, the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination are performed. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S505 that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” (step S505; No), the final stop constituting the big hit combination A combination of the confirmed decorative symbols to be symbols is determined (step S507). As an example, in the process of step S507, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Stop by aligning with the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 by referring to the stored predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S503, S504, S506, and S507, for example, according to the variation pattern identified by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the It is determined whether or not “there is a pseudo-ream” that executes a variable display effect of “” (step S508). At this time, if it is determined that there is “pseudo-continuous” (step S508; Yes), the decoration that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” and constitutes one of the pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8. A symbol is determined (step S509). As an example, in the process of step S509, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the pseudo consecutive chance updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance determination table, etc., every time a pseudo-continuous change (re-variation) is executed, a temporary stop display is performed and a decorative pattern constituting any of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 is determined. do it.

  When it is determined in step S508 that it is not “pseudo-continuous” (step S508; No), after executing the process of step S509, a continuous notice determination process (step S510), a continuous notice setting process, (Step S511) and the single notice setting process (Step S512) are sequentially executed. Before executing these processes, a process for determining a decorative symbol (pre-slip temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped in the “slip” variable display effect may be performed. In this case, for example, is “with slip” for executing a variable display effect of “slip” in accordance with the change pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. Determine whether or not. When it is determined that there is “slip”, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the pre-slip temporary stop symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined pre-sliding temporary stop symbol determination table stored in advance, a decorative symbol to be a pre-slip temporary stop symbol may be determined.

  After executing the single notice setting process in step S512, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S513). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as a usage pattern. Also, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern corresponding to the notice pattern determined in the setting process during continuous notice in step S511 or the single notice setting process in step S512. To do.

  Following the processing of step S513, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S514). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S515). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S514 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the five display areas. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S516), and the effect setting processing during variable display ends.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous notice determination process executed in step S510 of FIG. In the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is on (step S601). Here, the continuous notice execution flag is provided in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 and is set to the on state when it is determined that the execution of the continuous notice effect is started, while the continuous notice effect is executed. It is cleared and turned off when the last variable display of a plurality of variable displays is started. If the continuous notice execution flag is on in step S601, the setting for executing the continuous notice effect has already been made, and the continuous notice determination process is terminated.

  When the continuous notice execution flag is OFF in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the winning time determination flag is ON (step S602). At this time, if the winning determination flag is off (step S602; No), it is determined whether or not the winning specific pattern flag is on (step S603).

  When the winning determination flag is turned on in step S602 (step S602; Yes), or when the winning specific pattern flag is turned on in step S603 (step S603; Yes), the continuous notice determination buffer value is set in advance. It is determined whether or not it is within the predetermined continuous noticeable range (step S604). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a continuous notice effect over two to four variable displays. Therefore, in the process of step S604, if the continuous notice determination buffer value is any one of “2” to “4”, it may be determined that it is within the range of the continuous notice possible range. On the other hand, if the continuous notice determination buffer value is “1” or “5” or more, it may be determined that it is outside the range of the continuous notice possible range. Here, when the second special figure reserved memory number is set in the continuous notice determination buffer in step S166 shown in FIG. 33, the upper limit value of the second special figure reserved memory number is “4”. The determination buffer value never exceeds “5”. On the other hand, when the total reserved memory number is set in the continuous notice determination buffer in step S158 shown in FIG. 33, the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number becomes “8”. May be 5 "or more. When the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0”, both the winning time determination flag and the winning time specific pattern flag are off.

  Here, if too many variable displays are executed from the start of the execution of the continuous notice effect until the execution of the variable display subject to the notice by the continuous notice effect, the effect is delayed. There is a risk that the production effect by the continuous notice production will be reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the continuous notice effect is executed over 2 to 4 variable displays, and continuous corresponding to the case where the winning time determination flag or the winning special pattern flag is on. The upper limit value (for example, “4”) of the advance noticeable range is set to a value smaller than the upper limit value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number. Thereby, the fall of the production effect by the extension of production can be prevented.

  If the continuous notice determination buffer value is within the continuous noticeable range in step S604 (step S604; Yes), a continuous use table for determining whether to start execution of the continuous notice effect is used as the use table. The notice start determination table 140A is selected and set (step S605). On the other hand, if the continuous notice determination buffer value is outside the continuous noticeable range in step S604 (step S604; No), the continuous notice determination buffer value is updated to be subtracted by 1 (step S606). ). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the updated continuous notice determination buffer value is “0” (step S607). At this time, if the continuous notice determination buffer value is other than “0” (step S607; No), the continuous notice determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0” in step S607 (step S607; Yes), the winning time determination flag is cleared and turned off (step S608), and the winning specific pattern is determined. After clearing the flag to turn it off (step S609), the continuous notice determination process is terminated.

  If the winning specific pattern flag is OFF in step S603 (step S603; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure reservation storage number is within a predetermined continuous noticeable range (step S610). . Here, when the winning special pattern flag is OFF in step S603, there is no pending storage information that has been judged per winning time and judgment within the specific pattern common range. Judged not. In this case, both the determination that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” in the determination at the time of winning the start and the determination that the specific variation pattern is determined are not made. Whether or not to start the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined at the determined ratio. Then, in the process of step S610, for example, if a predetermined special figure reserved memory number such as the total reserved memory number is “1” or more, continuous notice effect over at least two variable displays including the variable display started this time. May be determined to be within the range of the continuous noticeable range. On the other hand, for example, when the total number of reserved storage is “0”, the variable display with the start condition is not yet held after the variable display started this time. What is necessary is just to determine with it being out of the range.

  When it is outside the range of the continuous noticeable range in step S610 (step S610; No), it is determined that the execution of the continuous notice effect cannot be started, and the continuous notice determination process is ended. On the other hand, when it is within the range of the continuous noticeable range in step S610 (step S610; Yes), the continuous notice is used as a use table for determining whether to start execution of the continuous notice effect. The start determination table 140B is selected and set (step S611).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S605 and S611, for example, the random number SR1- for determining the continuous notice start from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Numerical data representing 1 is extracted (step S612). Then, based on the random value SR1-1 extracted in step S612, the presence / absence of continuous notice is determined by referring to any of the successive notice start determination tables 140A and 140B selected as the use table (step S613). . At this time, it is determined whether or not the result of determination in step S613 is the start of continuous notice for starting execution of the continuous notice effect (step S614).

  If it is determined in step S614 that there is a continuous notice start (step S614; Yes), a continuous notice start setting process is executed (step S615), and then the continuous notice determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S614 that there is no continuous notice start (step S614; No), it is determined whether the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0” (step S616). Here, when it is determined in step S603 that the winning specific pattern flag is OFF, both the winning time determination flag and the winning specific pattern flag are OFF, so the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0”. (See steps S154 to S158 and steps S162 to S166 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S604 that the continuous notice determination buffer value is within the continuous noticeable range, the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2” to “ 4 ".

  Therefore, when the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0” in step S616 (step S616; Yes), the continuous notice determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the continuous notice determination buffer value is other than “0” (step S616; No), the continuous notice determination buffer value is updated to be subtracted by 1 (step S617), and then the continuous notice determination process is performed. finish. Accordingly, when it is determined that the execution of the continuous notice effect is not started even if the winning time determination or the determination within the common range of the specific pattern is made, the pending storage in which these determinations are made by the continuous notice determination buffer value. The information storage location (holding number, etc.) is stored in an identifiable manner, and when the next variable display is started, etc., it is determined whether to start the execution of the continuous notice effect based on these determination results. can do.

  If it is determined in step S606 that the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0” after subtracting the continuous notice determination buffer value by 1 in step S606, the winning time per time determination flag and the prize are determined in steps S608 and S609. The time specific pattern flag is turned off. As a result, in response to the fact that the variable display starts this time and there is no pending storage information that has been judged within the winning range or within the specific pattern common range, the winning time per winning time based on the occurrence of a new starting prize The presence / absence of the determination and the presence / absence of the determination within the specific pattern common range can be specified (see steps S153 to 158, steps S161 to S166, etc. in FIG. 33).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous notice start setting process executed in step S615 of FIG. In the continuous notice start setting process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0” (step S701). Here, after it is determined in step S603 shown in FIG. 36 that the winning specific pattern flag is OFF, if it is determined in step S614 that continuous notice starts, the continuous notice determination buffer value is set to “0”. It has become. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S604 that the continuous notice determination buffer value is within the range of the continuous notice possible range, and if it is determined in step S614 that the continuous notice starts, the continuous notice determination buffer value is It is either “2” to “4”.

  When the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0” in step S701 (step S701; Yes), the continuous notice determination buffer value is set based on, for example, the number of special figure hold storage (step S702). Here, when it is determined in step S610 shown in FIG. 36 that the special figure reserved memory number is within the range of the continuous noticeable range, the special figure reserved memory number is “1” or more, which is started this time. Including the variable display, it is possible to execute the continuous notice effect in two or more variable displays. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a continuous notice effect can be executed over two to four variable displays. Therefore, in the process of step S702, any value from “2” to “4” is continuously applied within a range that does not exceed the value obtained by adding “1” to the special figure reserved memory number (for example, the total reserved memory number). What is necessary is just to set as a notice determination buffer value.

  When the continuous notice determination buffer value is other than “0” in step S701 (step S701; No), after executing the process of step S702, the continuous notice pattern is used as a use table for determining the continuous notice pattern. The decision table 141 is selected and set (step S703). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR1-2 for determining the continuous notice pattern is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S704). . Then, based on the random value SR1-2 extracted in step S704, the continuous notice pattern determination table 141 is referred to, and the continuous notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S705). At this time, the continuous notice pattern is stored, for example, by storing data indicating that the determined continuous notice pattern can be specified in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S706).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S706, the continuous notice remaining count value is set (step S707). In the process of step S707, if a count initial value indicating the number of variable displays in which the continuous notice effect is executed is set in the continuous notice remaining number counter, corresponding to the continuous notice pattern determined in step S705. Good. For example, if the continuous notice pattern YRA2-1 or the continuous notice pattern YRA2-2 is determined in step S705, the continuous notice remaining number count value is set to “2” in step S707. If the continuous notice pattern YRA3-1 or the continuous notice pattern YRA3-2 is determined in step S705, the continuous notice remaining count value is set to “3” in step S707. Furthermore, if the continuous notice pattern YRA4-1 or the continuous notice pattern YRA4-2 is determined in step S705, the continuous notice remaining count value is set to “4” in step S707.

  After executing the process of step S707, the continuous notice determination buffer is cleared and the buffer value is initialized to “0” (step S708). At this time, the winning determination flag is cleared and turned off (step S709), and the winning specific pattern flag is cleared and turned off (step S710). In this way, the continuous notice determination buffer value is initialized to “0” in step S708, and the presence / absence of a winning time determination based on the occurrence of a new starting prize or the presence / absence of a determination within a specific pattern common range is specified. (See steps S153 to 158, steps S161 to S166, etc. in FIG. 33). Thereafter, in response to the start of execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice execution flag is set to the on state (step S711), and then the continuous notice start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuous notice setting process executed in step S511 of FIG. In the setting process during continuous notice shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is on (step S631). At this time, if the continuous notice execution flag is off, the continuous notice setting process is terminated in response to the fact that the execution of the continuous notice effect is not started.

  When the continuous notice execution flag is ON in step S631 (step S631; Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice remaining number count value is “1” (step S632). Here, after the initial count value corresponding to the number of times of variable display in which the continuous notice effect is executed is set in step S707 shown in FIG. 37, the continuous notice remaining number count value is set in the process of step S636 to be described later. Updated so that 1 is subtracted. Therefore, when the variable display to be notified by the continuous notice effect is started, the continuous notice remaining count value is “1”.

  If the continuous notice remaining number count value is other than “1” in step S632 (step S632; No), it is determined whether or not a predetermined continuous notice end condition is satisfied (step S633). Here, the continuous notice end condition may be set in advance as a predetermined condition for stopping the execution of the continuous notice effect before the variable display to be notified by the continuous notice effect is executed. The stop of the continuous notice effect may be generated as long as a predetermined effect that reduces the effect of the continuous notice effect is executed, for example. As a specific example, the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”, or the change pattern is determined to be a specific change pattern with super reach. It only has to be defined.

  When the continuous notice end condition is not satisfied in step S633 (step S633; No), the storage of the continuous notice pattern is read (step S634). Then, based on the continuous notice pattern or the continuous notice remaining count value, a notice pattern to be used in the variable display started this time is determined (step S635). Here, the notice pattern that becomes the use pattern in the variable display started this time corresponds to the determination result of the continuous notice pattern and the continuous notice remaining count value, for example, by setting as shown in FIG. Can be determined. Then, after updating so that the continuous notice remaining number count value is decremented by 1 (step S636), the setting process during continuous notice is ended.

  When the continuous notice end condition is satisfied in step S633 (step S633; Yes), the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed in the current variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. It is determined whether or not (step S637). Here, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” can be executed, the “pseudo-continuous” can be changed based on the determination on the main board 11 side, such as the variation pattern PA1-4 shown in FIG. Not only when the variation pattern for executing the display effect is specified, but the decision to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not made on the main board 11 side, for example, as with the variation pattern PA2-2. It is only necessary to include a case where a variation pattern that can be determined to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is designated on the effect control board 12 side.

  If it is determined in step S637 that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed (step S637; Yes), the continuous notice effect that matches the case where the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed is displayed. As execution setting, pseudo continuous continuous notice execution setting is performed (step S638). In this quasi-continuous continuous notice execution setting, a part or all of the continuous notice effect executed over a plurality of variable displays is made using the quasi-continuous change executed in the `` pseudo-continuous '' variable display effect. It is only necessary to set for execution in variable display based on the start condition being satisfied once. As an example, the normal variable display is executed once each for the initial fluctuation in the variable display in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, or for one or more changes after the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed. In the same way as in the case of the display, by setting a notice pattern corresponding to each change, a part or all of the continuous notice effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. do it. In addition, when the number of fluctuations due to the variable display effect of the “pseudo-continuous” (the number of fluctuations obtained by adding up the initial fluctuation and the fluctuation after the pseudo-continuous fluctuation) is greater than the remaining number of variable displays that execute the continuous notice effect, It may be set so that the notice effect by the predetermined notice pattern included in the continuous notice effect is repeatedly executed a plurality of times in any of the first change and the change after the pseudo continuous change in the variable display effect. On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations due to the variable display effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is less than the remaining number of variable displays that execute the continuous notice effect, the first change and the change after the pseudo-ream fluctuation of the variable display effect of the “pseudo-continuous” In this case, a part of the notice effect included in the continuous notice effect may be set to be executed.

  When the continuous notice remaining count value is “1” in step S632 (step S632; Yes), or when it is determined in step S637 that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect cannot be executed (step S637; No). Then, the storage of the continuous notice pattern is read (step S639), and the notice pattern to be used in the variable display that is started this time is determined in the same manner as step S635 (step S640).

  After executing the process of step S638 or after executing the process of step S640, in order to end the execution of the continuous notice effect in accordance with the current variable display, the continuous notice remaining number counter is cleared and the count is counted. The value is initialized to “0” (step S641), the continuous notice execution flag is cleared and turned off (step S642), and the continuous notice setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the single notice setting process executed in step S512 of FIG. In the single notice setting process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first selects and sets the single notice type determination table 142 as a use table for determining one of the plurality of kinds of the single notice types (step) S651). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the single notice type is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S652). . Then, based on the random value SR2-1 extracted in step S652, the single notice type is determined by referring to the single notice type determination table 142 (step S653). At this time, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S653 is a single notice without executing a single notice effect (step S654).

  In the setting example of the single notice type determination table 142 shown in FIG. 18A, whether the continuous notice execution flag is off or on, and the special figure display results are “losing”, “small hit”, “big hit”. The determination values are assigned so that the determination ratio without a single notice and the determination ratio of each single notice type in the case of executing a single notice effect differ depending on which of these is. Therefore, when determining the single notice type in step S653, there is no single notice depending on whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is started and the variable display result specified by the variable display result notification command. The probability to be determined changes, and the probability that the single notice type is determined and executed for each single notice type changes. Further, the possibility (reliability) of the special figure display result to be a “hit” changes depending on whether or not the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect are executed in combination.

  When it is determined in step S654 that there is no single notice (step S654; Yes), the single notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S654 that there is no single notice (step S654; No), it is determined whether or not the single notice type determined in step S653 is the single notice CTY1 ( Step S655). If it is determined that the single notice CTY1 has been decided (Step S655; Yes), the single notice pattern decision is made as a use table for deciding one of a plurality of patterns as the notice pattern for executing the single notice effect. The table 143A is selected and set (step S656). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the single notice CTY1 (step S655; No), the single notice pattern determination table 143B is selected and set (step S657).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S656 and S657, for example, a random number SR2- for determining a single notice pattern from numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Numerical data indicating 2 is extracted (step S658). Then, based on the random value SR2-2 extracted in step S658, by referring to any of the single notice pattern determination tables 143A and 143B selected as the use table, the use pattern for executing the single notice effect Is determined (step S659), and the single notice setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S653 that the single notice type CTY2 is the single notice type for executing the single notice effect of “operation notice”, based on the notice pattern determined in step S659, for example, When determining an effect control pattern in step S513 shown in FIG. 35, for example, it is determined whether or not there is a combination with the continuous notice effect by checking whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is on, Depending on the presence / absence of the combination or the content of the effect when combined with the continuous notice effect, a process of selecting one of a plurality of types of the notice effect control patterns to be used patterns may be executed. At this time, the presence / absence of a joint effect or the like, and the content of the joint effect are determined based on the combination of the notice pattern for executing the continuous notice effect, the notice pattern determined in step S659, and the like. Different notice effect control patterns may be selected according to the situation. Specifically, when the continuous notice execution flag is off and the notice pattern YPB1 is determined in step S659, the notice effect control pattern with the effect control code STB1-1 is determined as the notice pattern YPB2. When the notice effect control pattern with the effect control code STB2-1 is determined as the notice pattern YPB3, the notice effect control pattern with the effect control code STB3-1 is determined as the notice pattern YPB4. When the event occurs, the notice effect control pattern to which the effect control code STB4-1 is attached may be selected. On the other hand, when the continuous notice execution flag is ON and the notice pattern YPB1 is determined in step S659, the notice effect control pattern with the effect control code STB1-2 is decided as the notice pattern YPB2. When the notice effect control code STB2-2 attached is determined as the notice pattern YPB3, the notice effect control pattern assigned the effect control code STB3-2 is determined as the notice pattern YPB4. When it is done, the notice effect control pattern to which the effect control code STB4-2 is attached may be selected.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 of FIG. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 updates (for example, subtracts 1) the effect control process timer value (step S531), and uses the updated effect control process timer value as the effect control pattern. Is compared with the production control process timer determination value shown in FIG. 6 to determine whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S532).

  If the timer determination value matches with the timer determination value in step S532 (step S532; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, and the like) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the operation detection control data) or the end code is read (step S533). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern match the effect control process timer value in step S532, the plurality of effect controls stored in association with the matched timer determination values. The execution data may be read in step S533. Then, in step S533, it is determined whether or not the end code has been read (step S534). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S534; No), after performing the effect operation control according to the effect control execution data read in step S533 (step S535), variable The in-display effect process is terminated.

  For example, in the production operation control by the process of step S535, a display control command designated by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and a command corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data is issued. Of the transmission to the audio control board 13 and the output of the signal specified by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14, a part or all of them may be performed sequentially or in parallel (if only one operation is performed). If done alone). Further, in the effect operation control by the process of step S535, whether or not it is an operation effective period in which an operation action of the player or the like with respect to the operation button 30 is effectively detected based on the operation detection control data read out in step S533. Determine. At this time, if it is the operation valid period, it is determined based on the detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31 whether or not the player's operation on the operation button 30 has been detected. And when operation with respect to the operation button 30 is not detected but an operation valid period is complete | finished, presentation operation control according to operation detection control data is complete | finished. On the other hand, when an operation on the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, the operation on the operation button 30 is performed by changing to the effect control pattern specified by the operation detection control data, for example. It is only necessary to perform control or setting for changing the rendering operation in response to the above.

  If it is determined in step S534 that it is an end code (step S534; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S536). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S537), and the effect process during variable display is ended. As a result, when the next timer interrupt occurs, wait processing per special figure is executed, and if the hit start designation command is not received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses, the rendering process flag is cleared, The value is initialized to “0”. On the other hand, if a hit start designation command is received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses, effect control is performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or “big hit”. By updating the value of the process flag to “4” or “6”, it is only necessary to control the rendering operation at the time of a small hit or a big hit.

  Moreover, also when it does not correspond with any of the timer determination values in step S532 (step S532; No), the variable display effect processing is ended. However, if it is determined that the decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received after executing the process of step S532 or before executing the process of step S532, the process of step S536 is performed. In advance, the waiting process per special figure may be executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  Next, specific examples of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is formed. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S218 in FIG. 24 when the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, In S220, a winning random number determination process is executed.

  In the winning random number determination process, when it is determined in step S405 in FIG. 25 that the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range (step S405; Yes), step S407 is performed. Based on the transmission setting, the first start opening winning designation command for notifying the winning time determination is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, when it is determined in step S411 in FIG. 25 that the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the big hit determination range (step S411; Yes), the transmission setting in step S413 is performed. Based on this, the second start opening winning designation command for notifying the winning time determination is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  When it is determined in step S151 in FIG. 33 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received, the effect control board 12 determines that the winning time determination flag is notified in step S154. Is set to the on state (step S155), and the continuous notice determination buffer is set (step S158). In addition, when it is determined in step S159 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received, and it is determined in step S162 that the winning time determination is notified, the winning time determination flag is set to the on state. At the same time (step S163), the continuous notice determination buffer is set (step S166). By setting the continuous notice determination buffer in this way, the variable display holding position (holding number) where the variable display result becomes “big hit” or the like due to the random value MR1 being in the big hit determination range or the like is specified. Can do.

  Thereafter, when it is determined in step S602 of FIG. 36 that the winning time determination flag is ON (step S602; Yes), if the continuous notice determination buffer value is within the continuous noticeable range (step S604; Yes). In order to determine whether or not to start the execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice start determination table 140A is selected as the use table (step S605), and it is determined whether or not to start the execution of the continuous notice effect (step S605). Steps S612 and S613). In this embodiment, for example, by using continuous notice start determination tables 140A and 140B as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, when the winning time determination flag is on, it is off. It is possible to make a decision to start execution of the continuous notice effect at a higher rate.

  When it is determined to start the execution of the continuous notice effect (step S614; Yes), for example, a continuous notice start setting process as shown in FIG. 37 is executed (step S615). At this time, by referring to the continuous notice pattern determination table 141 selected in the use table in step S703 of FIG. ). In this embodiment, for example, by using a continuous notice pattern determination table 141 as shown in FIG. 17A, the continuous notice pattern is determined according to whether or not the winning time determination flag is on. The ratio can be changed.

  In addition, in order to determine whether or not to execute the single notice effect, the single notice setting process as shown in FIG. 39 is executed in step S512 of FIG. At this time, by referring to the single notice type determination table 142 selected in the use table in step S651 in FIG. 39, the presence / absence of the single notice effect or the single notice type in the case of executing the single notice effect is determined. (Steps S652, S653). In this embodiment, for example, by using a single notice type determination table 142 as shown in FIG. 18A, whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is on, and depending on the special figure display result, The determination ratio of the notice type can be changed. Here, when the continuous notice effect is executed in response to the continuous notice execution flag being turned on, when the single notice effect is executed, the single notice CTY2 that becomes the single notice effect of the “operation notice” is displayed. A determined value is assigned so as to be determined as a single notice type. Therefore, the notice effect based on the operation by the player or the like on the operation button 30 can be executed as the single notice effect combined with the continuous notice effect.

  When it is determined to execute the single notice effect (step S654; No), by referring to any of the single notice pattern determination tables 143A and 143B selected in the use table according to the single notice type (steps S655 to S657). ), A notice pattern for executing a single notice effect is determined (steps S658 and S659). In this embodiment, for example, by using the single notice pattern determination tables 143A and 143B as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the decision ratio of the notice pattern is changed according to the special figure display result. be able to.

  By setting these various tables and executing various processes, for example, as shown in FIG. 41, depending on the combination of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect, the jackpot reliability as the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” The degree can be varied.

  FIG. 42 shows an example of an effect operation that is executed in combination with the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect when the display result (variable display result) in the variable display subject to notice by the continuous notice effect is “big hit”. Yes. In this effect operation example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), four display parts are displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H in response to the first special figure holding memory number being “4”. Assume that the winning determination flag is set to ON when the display is blue. At this time, “4”, which is the total number of reserved memories after the start winning, is set in the continuous notice determination buffer in step S158 of FIG. In step S705 of FIG. 37, it is assumed that the continuous notice pattern YRA4-1 is determined as the use pattern.

  In this case, after the continuous notice remaining count value is set to “4” in step S707 in FIG. 37, the notice pattern YPA4-1 is determined as the use pattern in the current variable display in step S635 in FIG. The At this time, 1 is subtracted from the continuous notice remaining number count value in step S636 and updated to “3”. On the main board 11 side, in response to the start of the special symbol change in the special figure game, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 in step S237 of FIG. 27 to “3”. Has been updated. In step S653 of FIG. 39, it is assumed that the determination is made without a single notice. Thereafter, for example, based on the setting in step S515 in FIG. 35, in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, For example, from the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 42A, variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. 42B, for example. In this variable display, an effect image in which one blue balloon appears is displayed as the notice effect by the first notice pattern YPA4-1 included in the successive notice effect based on the continuous notice pattern YRA4-1.

  After the decorative symbol variable display as shown in FIG. 42 (B) is performed, for example, when the fixed decorative symbol resulting in the variable display as shown in FIG. Since the memorized number is “3”, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is established, and the variation of the special symbol is started. Correspondingly, the first special figure reservation storage number is updated to “2”. At this time, in step S635 of FIG. 38, the notice pattern YPA3-1 is determined as the use pattern in the current variable display. In step S636, the count value of the remaining number of continuous notices is decremented by 1 and updated to “2”. Then, after the single notice type is determined to be the single notice type CTY2 in step S653 of FIG. 39, it is assumed that the notice pattern YPB1 is determined in step S659. When variable display of decorative symbols is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on these determination results, for example, this corresponds to the notice pattern YPB1. The display of the effect image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 by setting the effect control execution data in the notice effect control pattern (see FIG. 14C) with the effect control code STB1-2 attached. Done.

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started in this way, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), for example, as a notice effect by the second notice pattern YPA3-1 included in the successive notice effect based on the successive notice pattern YRA4-1. The effect image that causes two blue balloons to appear is displayed. Then, when a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, as shown in FIGS. 42D and 42E, the notification effect of the notification pattern YPB1 is brown. As one bow and arrow passes, an effect image in which the balloons fly away is displayed. The display of the effect image in which the balloons fly away may be executed as long as the connection effect E1 (see FIG. 14C). When a predetermined operation on the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period, only the effect image that the balloons fly away may be displayed as the connection effect E1, or the effect image without the balloons flying away. The display of may be deleted. Thus, by displaying the effect image through which the bow and arrow pass only when a predetermined operation on the operation button 30 is detected, the player can increase the willingness to operate the operation button 30 and participate in the game. .

  When the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result as shown in FIG. 42E is derived and displayed, the first special figure holding memory number is “2”, so that the special figure game using the first special figure is used. The start condition is established, and the special symbol starts to change. Correspondingly, the first special figure reservation storage number is updated to “1”. At this time, in step S635 of FIG. 38, the notice pattern YPA2-1 is determined as the use pattern in the current variable display. In step S636, the count value of the remaining continuous notice count is subtracted by 1 and updated to “1”. It is assumed that the determination is made in step S653 in FIG. Based on these determination results, for example, after the decorative symbol variable display is started as shown in FIG. 42 (F), the third warning pattern YPA2 included in the continuous warning effect based on the continuous warning pattern YRA4-1. As a notice effect by -1, an effect image in which three blue balloons appear is displayed.

  Thereafter, for example, when a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result as shown in FIG. 42 (G) is derived and displayed, the first special figure holding memory number is “1”, so the first special figure is used. The special symbol game start condition is satisfied, and the special symbol variation starts. Correspondingly, the first special figure reservation storage number is updated to “0”. At this time, based on the determination that the continuous notice remaining number count value is “1” in step S632 of FIG. 38 (step S632; Yes), the notice pattern YPA1-1 is variably displayed this time in step S640. The usage pattern is determined. In step S641, the continuous notice remaining number counter is cleared and its count value is initialized to “0”. Further, it is assumed that after the single notice type is determined to be the single notice type CTY2 in step S653 of FIG. 39, the notice pattern YPB4 is determined in step S659. Here, in the special figure game of this time, the special figure display result is decided to be “big hit”, so in the setting example of the single notice pattern decision table 143B as shown in FIG. 19B, the notice pattern YPB4 is decided. The ratio becomes higher. Based on these determination results and the like, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started as shown in FIG. 42 (H), for example, the notice effect control with the effect control code STB4-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YPB4 is provided. The effect image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed by setting the effect control execution data in the pattern (see FIG. 14C).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started in this way, as shown in FIG. 42 (H), for example, as a notice effect by the fourth notice pattern YPA1-1 included in the notice result continuously based on the notice pattern YRA4-1. The effect image for causing four red balloons to appear is displayed. When a predetermined operation on the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 42 (I), an effect image in which two golden bows and arrows pass is displayed as a notice effect by the notice pattern YPB4. Is done. At this time, for example, as a connection effect E4 (see FIG. 14C), a display of an effect image in which a balloon bursts as shown in FIG. 42J, or a character dialogue as shown in FIG. The notification of the message “You did it!” Or the like may be executed.

  When a predetermined operation on the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period, only the effect image that the balloons fly away may be displayed as the connection effect E4, or the effect image without the balloons flying away The display of may be deleted. In this way, by displaying the effect image that the bow and arrow pass only when the predetermined operation on the operation button 30 is detected, the effect image that the balloon bursts, the notification of the message that becomes the character's speech, etc. The user can increase the willingness to participate in the game by operating the operation buttons 30. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (L), the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 43 shows an example of an effect operation executed in combination with the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect when the display result (variable display result) in the variable display subject to notice by the continuous notice effect is “losing”. Yes. In this effect operation example, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), four display parts are displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H in response to the first special figure holding memory number being “4”. When the display is blue, it is determined to start execution of the continuous notice effect. For example, when the winning specific pattern flag is set to ON in step S157 of FIG. 33, “4”, which is the total reserved memory number after starting winning, is stored in the continuous notice determination buffer in step S158 of FIG. Is set. Further, when the winning determination flag or the winning specific pattern flag is OFF, the continuous notice determination buffer value may be set to “4” in step S702 of FIG. In step S705, it is assumed that the continuous notice pattern YRA4-2 is determined as the use pattern.

  In this case, after the continuous notice remaining count value is set to “4” in step S707 in FIG. 37, the notice pattern YPA4-1 is determined as the use pattern in the current variable display in step S635 in FIG. The At this time, the continuous notice remaining count value is updated to “3”. On the main board 11 side, the first special figure holding storage number is updated to “3” in response to the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game. The single notice effect is determined without a single notice in step S653 of FIG. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), from the state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, variable display of the decorative symbols is started as shown in FIG. 43 (B), for example. In this variable display, an effect image in which one blue balloon appears is displayed as the notice effect by the first notice pattern YPA4-1 included in the successive notice effect based on the continuous notice pattern YRA4-2.

  After the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 43 (B) is performed, for example, when the fixed decorative symbol resulting in the variable display as shown in FIG. 43 (C) is derived and displayed, the first special figure is suspended. Since the memorized number is “3”, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is established, and the variation of the special symbol is started. Correspondingly, the first special figure reservation storage number is updated to “2”. At this time, the notice pattern YPA3-1 is determined as the use pattern in the current variable display. Further, the continuous notice remaining count value is decremented by 1 and updated to “2”. Then, it is assumed that the single notice type is determined to be the single notice type CTY2 and then the notice pattern YPB1. When variable display of decorative symbols is started based on these determination results, for example, a notice effect control pattern with an effect control code STB1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YPB1 (see FIG. 14C). The effect image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed by setting the effect control execution data at.

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started in this way, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), for example, as a notice effect by the second notice pattern YPA3-1 included in the notice result series based on the notice pattern YRA4-2. The effect image that causes two blue balloons to appear is displayed. Then, when a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, as shown in FIGS. 43D and 43E, as a notice effect by the notice pattern YPB1, An effect image in which one bow and arrow passes and the balloons fly away is displayed. The display of the effect image in which the balloons fly away may be executed as long as the connection effect E1 (see FIG. 14C).

  When the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result as shown in FIG. 43E is derived and displayed, the first special figure holding memory number is “2”, so the special figure game using the first special figure is used. The start condition is established, and the special symbol starts to change. Correspondingly, the first special figure reservation storage number is updated to “1”. At this time, the notice pattern YPA2-1 is determined as the use pattern in the current variable display. In addition, the continuous notice remaining count value is decremented by 1 and updated to “1”. Then, if it is determined without a single notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 43 (F), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, the third time included in the continuous notice effect based on the continuous notice pattern YRA4-2. As a notice effect by the notice pattern YPA2-1, an effect image in which three blue balloons appear is displayed.

  After that, for example, when a definite decorative symbol resulting in variable display as shown in FIG. 43 (G) is derived and displayed, the first special figure holding memory number is “1”, so the first special figure is used. The special symbol game start condition is satisfied, and the special symbol variation starts. Correspondingly, the first special figure reservation storage number is updated to “0”. At this time, the notice pattern YPA1-2 is determined as the usage pattern in the current variable display. Then, the continuous notice remaining number counter is cleared and its count value is initialized to “0”. Further, it is assumed that the single notice type is determined to be the single notice type CTY2 and then the notice pattern YPB1. Here, in the special figure game of this time, the special figure display result is decided to be “losing”, so in the setting example of the single notice pattern decision table 143B as shown in FIG. 19B, the notice pattern YPB1 is decided. The ratio becomes higher. Based on these determination results and the like, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started as shown in FIG. 43 (H), for example, the notice effect control with the effect control code STB1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YPB1 is performed. An effect image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed by setting the effect control execution data in the pattern.

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started in this way, as shown in FIG. 43 (H), for example, as a notice effect by the fourth notice pattern YPA1-2 included in the notice result series based on the successive notice pattern YRA4-2. The effect image that causes four blue balloons to appear is displayed. When a predetermined operation on the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 43 (I), an effect image in which one brown bow and arrow passes is displayed as a notice effect by the notice pattern YPB1. Is done. At this time, for example, as a connection effect E1 (see FIG. 14C), a display of an effect image in which the balloons fly away as shown in FIG. 43J or a character dialogue as shown in FIG. It is only necessary to execute a message such as “Sorry!”. After that, for example, a decorative design as shown in FIG. 43 (L) is stopped and displayed, and a finalized decorative design that is a combination of lost is derived and displayed.

  In step S705 of FIG. 37, referring to a continuous notice pattern determination table 141 as shown in FIG. 17A as a use table selected in step S703, a continuous notice effect is provided corresponding to the continuous notice pattern. The number of variable displays to be executed may be larger than the number of variable displays indicated by the continuous notice determination buffer value. For example, if the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2” when the winning flag determination flag is on, the random number SR1-2 is any one of “351” to “400”. The continuous notice pattern YRA3-1 is determined as the use pattern. As shown in FIG. 17B, the continuous notice pattern YRA3-1 is set so that a continuous notice effect can be executed over three variable displays. On the other hand, when the winning determination flag is ON and the continuous notice determination buffer value is “2”, the variable display result is “small hit” or “big hit” in the second variable display. This second variable display becomes the variable display of the notice target by the continuous notice effect. In this example, when the second variable display is started, it is determined in step S632 of FIG. 38 that the continuous notice remaining count value is “2” and not “1” (step S632). No). If the variable display result is determined to be “small hit” or “big hit” as the continuous notice end condition, when the second variable display is started, in step S633 in FIG. It is determined that the continuous notice end condition is satisfied (step S633). At this time, based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the determination on the side of the production control board 12, is it possible to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display production in step S637? If it can be executed, in step S638, the continuous notice in the second and third variable display is performed using the pseudo continuous fluctuation executed in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”. It is only necessary to perform the pseudo continuous continuous notice execution setting for executing the effect in variable display based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied once.

  In this way, when a part or all of the continuous notice effect is executed using the pseudo continuous fluctuation executed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, in order to execute the single notice effect in step S659 of FIG. When determining the previous notice pattern, the notice pattern of the single notice effect executed in combination with the continuous notice effect executed by each variation using the pseudo continuous variation may be determined. In the above example, when the continuous notice effect in the second and third variable display is executed by using the pseudo continuous change executed in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the continuous display in each variable display is performed. The notice pattern of the single notice effect executed in combination with the notice effect may be sequentially determined in step S659.

  Even if the start condition of the number of times less than the number of variable displays in which the continuous notice effect is executed is established by performing such a pseudo continuous continuous notice execution setting and the setting of the notice pattern corresponding thereto, The continuous notice effect can be executed to the end by using the pseudo continuous fluctuation executed in the variable display effect of the “pseudo ream”, and the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect can be executed in combination. .

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, at the time of occurrence of the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, in step S218 in FIG. On the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values MR1 to MR3, a winning random number value determination process as shown in FIG. 25 is executed in step S220, and the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step S405 and step S411. It is determined whether or not the special figure display result is determined as “big hit”. In step S613 in FIG. 36, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed over a plurality of variable displays based on the determination result at the time of the start winning, etc. After the continuous notice pattern is determined in step S705, the effect operation control in step S535 in FIG. 40 is executed based on the notice pattern determined in steps S635 and S640 in FIG. A continuous notice effect is executed in the display. Also, when the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied, whether or not the special figure display result is set to “big hit” in step S240 based on the random number value MR1 read out in steps S232 and S236 of FIG. Such a decision is made. In step S653 of FIG. 39, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the single notice effect based on the determination result when the start condition of the special figure game is established, and when it is determined to be executed, in step S659 By performing the effect operation control in step S535 of FIG. 40 based on the determined notice pattern or the like, a single notice effect is executed in a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure game for which the start condition is satisfied. At this time, as shown in FIG. 41, for example, according to the combination of the single notice effect and the continuous notice effect, the variable display result becomes “big hit” and the big hit reliability as the reliability controlled to the big hit gaming state Etc. are different. Thereby, a player's attention with respect to both a single notice effect and a continuous notice effect can be raised, and a game interest can be improved.

  In step S110 of FIG. 22, when the special symbol normal process as shown in FIG. 27 is executed and it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding memory number is “0” (step S231). No), in step S235, it is determined whether or not the first special figure holding memory number is “0”. Accordingly, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. In addition, when the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” ends, based on the fact that the big hit type is determined to be “non-probable change” in step S323 of FIG. In step S324, the setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the time-saving state is performed, and the time-saving flag is set to the on state. If it is determined in step S323 that the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, in step S325, setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the probability change state is performed. May be set to the on state. Thus, when the time reduction flag is turned on, when the high release control is started together with the time reduction control in the time reduction state or the probability change state, for example, the normal time fluctuation time in the normal game is set to a short time, The rate at which the figure display result is determined to be “per normal map” increases, and the tilt control time during which the second starting prize opening is in the expanded open state when the general map display result is “per normal map” By increasing the number of tilt control times, or by combining some or all of these, it becomes easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening. Then, when it is determined in step S403 in FIG. 25 that the time-shortening control is being performed (step S403; Yes), in step S404, a first start opening winning designation command for notifying the big hit / short-time medium winning is transmitted. For example, the execution of the determination based on the random value MR1 in step S405 is restricted.

  When the high opening control is performed in the short-time state or the certainty-change state, it is easy for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the reserved memory information of the special figure game using the first special figure is stored. When the execution of the continuous notice effect is started based on this, it is variable by continuously executing the special game using the second special figure that is preferentially executed by passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening. The variable display can be continuously executed a number of times in a state in which the hold storage information whose display result is “big hit” is held. In this case, the continuous notice effect is an effect of notifying the state in which the hold storage information whose variable display result is “big hit” is held, and the variable display result is obtained by executing the special figure game using the second special figure. Becomes a “hit” and is repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a possibility that the gambling of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is remarkably enhanced. In addition, while recognizing that the variable display result is “big hit” in the special game using the first special figure, the player repeatedly passes (enters) the game ball to the second start winning opening to make the second special game. Depending on whether the special figure game using the figure is repeatedly executed or the special figure game using the first special figure is executed without passing (entering) the game ball to the second start winning opening, the variable display result is “ There is a possibility that the timing at which the game is set to “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state may be greatly changed depending on the skill of the player. Therefore, during the time-shortening control, the special game using the first special figure is set so that the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the detection of the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening is not started. Thus, the player can not recognize that there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, thereby ensuring a healthy game playability.

  When determining the single notice type in step S653 of FIG. 39, referring to the single notice type determining table 142 as shown in FIG. When the continuous notice execution flag is on, the single notice type can be determined as the single notice type without the single notice or the single notice CTY2, and the single notice effect of “operation notice” is executed as the single notice effect combined with the continuous notice effect. Let Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced and the game interest can be improved.

  At the time of occurrence of a start winning when the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 extracted in step S218 of FIG. In S408 and step S414, it is determined whether or not a specific variation pattern is within a specific pattern common range, and it is determined whether or not a specific variation pattern is determined. In step S613 in FIG. 36, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect at a different rate depending on whether or not the specific pattern is within the common pattern range. The continuous notice pattern is determined in step S705 in FIG. 37 at a different rate depending on whether or not the pattern is within the common pattern range. Thereafter, the effect operation control in step S535 in FIG. 40 is executed based on the notice pattern determined in steps S635 and S640 in FIG. 38, whereby a continuous notice effect is executed in a plurality of variable displays. Thereby, before the variable display corresponding to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is executed, the possibility that the variable display by the specific variation pattern is executed is executed. Notification can be made, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Also, the lost variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the lost variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D have different assignments of determination values to the variation pattern types CA1-3 and CA2-1. . Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, the determination value is not assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 or the variation pattern type CA2-3, while the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern is determined. A decision value is assigned to the type CA2-2. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern type CA2-2, while the variation pattern type CA1-2. Further, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-3. By setting the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the variation pattern types CA1- other than the variation pattern types CA2-4 including the variation pattern with super reach are included. The allocation of determination values to 1 to variation pattern types CA1-3 and variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 differs depending on the gaming state and the number of special figure hold memories. This makes it possible to adjust the variable display time of the special pattern and decoration pattern by varying the rate of determination of the variation pattern according to the number of reserved memory of the special figure game, so that the variable display is possible when the number of reserved memory is large. While increasing the efficiency, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being interrupted when the number of reserved memories is small, thereby reducing the game interest.

  On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, common determination values “230” to “251” for the variation pattern type CA2-4. Is assigned. This makes it possible to reliably determine whether or not the specific variation pattern is determined regardless of the gaming state or the special figure holding memory number.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, after it is determined in step S613 in FIG. 36 that there is a continuous notice start to start execution of the continuous notice effect, the single notice setting process as shown in FIG. 39 is performed in step S512 in FIG. As described above, each time variable display is started, the presence / absence of a single notice effect combined with the continuous notice effect, the notice pattern corresponding to the single notice effect when combined, and the like are determined. On the other hand, when a decision to start execution of the continuous notice effect is made, the presence or absence of a single notice effect combined with the continuous notice effect corresponding to a plurality of variable displays in which the continuous notice effect is executed, A notice pattern corresponding to a single notice effect in combination may be determined.

  In this case, as a table to be referred to in order to determine the presence / absence of the single notice effect combined with the continuous notice effect and the notice pattern of the single notice effect in the case of the combination, for example, the single notice pattern determination as shown in FIG. A table 143C is prepared in advance. In the single notice pattern determination table 143C, for example, a determination result without notice indicating that a single notice effect is not executed according to a flag state such as a determination flag ON per winning time or a specific pattern flag ON when winning, or the value of the variable M, , A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR2-2 for determining the single notice pattern is assigned to the notice patterns YPB1 to YPB4 for executing the single notice effect of “operation notice”. Yes.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a process shown in FIG. 45 instead of the process shown in FIG. 37 as the continuous notice start setting process executed in step S615 of FIG. In the process shown in FIG. 45, after setting the continuous notice remaining number count value in step S707, the single notice determination process at the time of continuous notice is executed (step S707A). FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing an example of the single notice determination process at the time of continuous notice executed in step S707A of FIG.

  In the single advance notice determination process at the time of continuous notice shown in FIG. 46A, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the continuous notice remaining count value as the initial value of the variable M (step S751). Then, the single notice pattern determination table 143C is selected and set as a use table for determining the presence / absence of the single notice effect and the notice pattern (step S752).

  Thereafter, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2-2 for determining the single notice pattern is extracted from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S753). Then, based on the random value SR2-2 extracted in step S753, the presence / absence of the single notice effect or the notice pattern when the single notice effect is executed is determined by referring to the single notice pattern determination table 143C. (Step S754). At this time, for example, the determination result of the notice pattern in step S754 is stored in association with the value of the variable M (step S755).

  Following the processing of step S755, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable M is “1” (step S756). If the value of the variable M is “1” (step S756; Yes), continuous notice is given. The single notice determination process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the variable M is other than “1” (step S756; No), the value of the variable M is updated to be decremented by 1 (step S757), and the process returns to the process of step S753. The presence / absence of a single notice effect corresponding to the updated variable M and the notice pattern are determined.

  As an example, in the process of step S755, as shown in FIG. 46B, the determination result of the notice pattern may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 in association with the value of the variable M so as to be specified. Thus, when it is decided to start the execution of the continuous notice effect, the presence / absence of the single notice effect combined with the continuous notice effect and the notice pattern are determined and specified for each variable display for which the continuous notice effect is executed. It can be stored as possible.

  In this case, in the single advance notice setting process executed in step S512 of FIG. 35, for example, it is determined whether the continuous advance notice execution flag is on or off. If it is off, step S651 shown in FIG. The process of -S659 should just be performed. On the other hand, when the continuous notice execution flag is on, according to the value of the variable M corresponding to the continuous notice remaining number count value, the determination result of the notice pattern stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is read, If the read result is no notice, the single notice effect may not be executed. On the other hand, if the read result is any one of the notice patterns YPB1 to YPB4, a single notice effect corresponding to the read notice pattern may be executed.

  Alternatively, for example, a single notice pattern determination table 143D as shown in FIG. 44B is used as a table to be referred to in order to determine the presence / absence of the single notice effect combined with the continuous notice effect and the notice pattern of the single notice effect when combined. It may be prepared in advance. In the single notice pattern determination table 143D, for example, a determination result without notice indicating that the single notice effect is not executed for each value of the variable M according to a flag state such as a determination flag on per winning time or a specific pattern flag on winning, etc. And a random number SR2-2 for determining a single notice pattern for a combination pattern in which any one of the notice patterns YPB1 to YPB4 for executing the single notice effect of “operation notice” is set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared is assigned. In this case, in the single notice determination process at the time of continuous notice shown in FIG. 46A, in step S752, the single notice pattern determination table 143D is selected as the use table for determining the presence / absence of the single notice effect and the notice pattern. In step S753, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR2-2 for determining the single notice pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. To extract. Then, by referring to the single notice pattern determination table 143D based on the random value SR2-2 extracted in step S753, the presence / absence of the single notice effect and the single notice effect are executed for each value of the variable M. A combination pattern in which any one of the notice patterns is set is determined (step S754), and the single notice determination process at the time of continuous notice may be terminated without executing the processes of steps S755 and S756.

  In the above-described embodiment, whether or not a winning time per hour determination or a specific variation pattern is determined using the EXT data of the starting opening winning designation command such as the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command. In the above description, the determination result is notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separately from the command for notifying that the game ball has passed (entered) through the start winning opening, a command for notifying the determination result when the start winning occurs (determination at the time of winning) Notification command) may be prepared. In this case, a common command is used as a command for notifying whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening as a command for notifying determination results such as winning time determination. In some cases, the number of types of production control commands and the like can be reduced. As an example, in the configuration example shown in FIG. 4C, it is necessary to prepare seven types of effect control commands. On the other hand, when a start opening prize designation command and a prize determination notification command are separately prepared. A total of six types of commands, including two types of start opening winning designation commands and four types of winning determination notification commands, can reduce the number of types of commands. In particular, the number of types of commands can be greatly reduced by separately providing a start opening winning designation command and a winning determination notification command as the determination contents at the time of starting winning are increased.

  As an example of the determination contents at the time of occurrence of the start winning prize, when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”, the determination as to whether or not the big hit type of “probability change” is determined may be included. Then, in the continuous notice effect based on the determination result that “big change” is determined as the big hit type, an effect operation different from the effect contents (effect mode) in the other continuous notice effects may be performed. Or, the decision on whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect at a different rate according to the determination result of whether or not it is decided to be a big hit type of “probability change”, and the contents of the effect (effect mode) in the continuous notice effect The determination of the continuous notice pattern may be performed. In addition, when the determination result that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” and the big hit type is determined to be “probable change” is notified as the determination contents at the time of occurrence of the start winning prize, May be executed in combination. Alternatively, when the determination result that the jackpot type is determined to be “probable change” is notified, the combination of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the decision result is not notified. You may be made to do.

  As another example of the determination content at the time of occurrence of the start winning prize, a determination as to whether or not the variable display mode is determined as “non-reach” may be included. For example, when it is determined in step S408 or step S414 in FIG. 25 that the random value MR3 is outside the range of the specific pattern common range, the random value MR3 is variable to “non-reach” regardless of the number of special figure reservations stored. It is determined whether or not it is within a common range as a display mode. Here, in the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132D shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “1” to “99”, the special figure holding memory is stored. Regardless of the number or the like, the variable display mode of “non-reach” is determined, and this range may be set within the range of the common range that is the variable display mode of “non-reach”. On the side of the production control board 12, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is started, the variable display executed before the variable display subject to the notice by the continuous notice effect is all “non-reach” variable display. In this case, in each variable display, based on the determination on the side of the effect control board 12, a continuous chance eye display for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol constituting a predetermined chance eye, or a variable display effect of “slip” Continuous slip effect to execute, change the order of continuous stop to change the order in which the definite decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. For example, the stop order of “Left” → “Right” → “Middle” is normally set to “Right” → “Middle” → “Left” stop order). Continuous production display It may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 executes the processing of steps S402 and S403 shown in FIG. It demonstrated as restrict | limiting the determination of the hold | maintenance memory information based on the ball | bowl passing (entrance) the 1st start winning opening. On the other hand, on the side of the main board 11, the stored storage information is determined regardless of whether the big hit or the short-time control is being performed, while the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 performs a predetermined process. By executing the above, it may be possible to limit the start determination of the continuous notice effect based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning opening during the big hit or the time-shortening control. In this case, for example, after performing the process of step S152 shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the effect process flag is “6” or “7”, or any other value. It is determined whether or not a big hit is made. Further, the effect control CPU 120 reads a gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like to determine whether or not the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a certain change state or a short time state and is being controlled in a short time. judge. Then, when it is determined that a big hit is being made or when it is determined that the time reduction control is being performed, the determination in step S154 or step S156 is not executed, for example, by ending the start winning command processing. do it.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S153 of FIG. 33 that the continuous notice determination buffer value is other than “0”, the command process at the start winning prize is terminated without executing the processes of steps S154 to S158. In addition, when it is determined in step S161 that the continuous notice determination buffer value is other than “0”, the start winning command processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps S162 to S166. Therefore, after the continuous notice determination buffer value is set in step S158 or step S166, for example, until the continuous notice determination buffer value is decremented by 1 in step S606 in FIG. Until the continuous notice determination buffer is cleared and the buffer value is initialized to “0” in step S708 in FIG. 37, when a new start winning is generated, determination per winning time or determination within a specific pattern common range is made. It is invalidated without being saved. On the other hand, even before the execution of the continuous notice effect, the determination results such as the winning time determination and the determination within the specific pattern common range corresponding to the case where the start winning is generated a plurality of times are obtained. It may be saved. As an example, in accordance with the case where the start winning is generated a plurality of times (for example, up to 5 times), the determination information at the time of winning combined with the setting contents such as the determination flag per winning time, the specific pattern flag at winning time, the continuous notice determination buffer, etc. May be provided, and a winning time determination storage unit may be provided that stores the order relation (first and second) in which the game ball has passed (entered) through the start winning opening. The winning determination determination storage unit receives a winning order determination or a determination within a specific pattern common range by the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command, in the order of winning to the starting winning opening ( The game ball detection order) is associated with a predetermined storage number (for example, “1” to “5”, etc.), and the winning time determination flag, the winning specific pattern flag, the setting contents of the continuous notice determination buffer, etc. Just remember. In this case, the number of times the winning time determination or the determination within the specific pattern common range is notified by the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command is sufficiently smaller than the number of start winning occurrences. Therefore, the upper limit storage number (for example, “5”) of the winning determination information in the winning determination storage unit may be smaller than the upper limit (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number.

  In such a configuration, after the winning time determination or the determination within the common range of the specific pattern is made by the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted at the time of detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) first through the start winning opening, While the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the determination result is not started, it is determined that the winning time is determined or the specific pattern is within a common range based on the random numbers MR1 to MR3 extracted at the time of detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) after the start winning opening. If the determination is made, the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the subsequent start winning may be restricted until the variable display based on the previous start winning ends. For example, in step S606 and step S617 of FIG. 36, among the setting contents of the continuous notice determination buffer indicated in each winning determination information stored in the winning determination storage unit, the buffer value is other than “0”. For each, a process of subtracting 1 is executed. When it is determined in step S607 that the continuous notice determination buffer value indicated in the winning determination information stored at the head of the winning determination storage unit (save number is “1”) has become “0”, The winning determination information is deleted, and the winning determination information stored in the entry lower than the storage number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the storage numbers “2” to “5”) is stored in the winning determination storage unit. One entry is shifted up. Also, in steps S602 to S604 in FIG. 36, the winning time per time determination flag and the winning time specific pattern flag indicated in the winning time determination information stored at the head of the winning time determination storage unit (save number “1”) Whether or not to start the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the winning judgment information corresponding to the game ball that has passed (entered) the start winning opening first after making a judgment based on the setting contents of the notice judgment buffer value A decision may be made.

  As another example of enabling determination results such as determination per winning time and determination within a specific pattern common range to be saved in response to a case where a start winning is generated a plurality of times, a first start opening winning designation command or a second start opening The determination results based on the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted at the occurrence of the start winning are obtained by associating with the hold numbers in the receiving order of the designated commands (game ball detection order) and storing the EXT data in these commands. You may provide the start winning information holding | maintenance memory | storage part which memorize | stores identifiable about variable display. In this case, the start winning information storage unit stores the EXT data in association with a predetermined hold number (for example, any one of “1” to “4”) in response to the reception of the first start opening winning designation command. An area and an area for storing EXT data in association with a predetermined hold number (for example, any one of “1” to “4”) in response to receiving the second start opening winning designation command It only has to be done. That is, the upper limit storage number (for example, “8”) of the EXT data in the start winning information storage unit may be set to be the same as the upper limit value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number. In such a configuration, for example, in the variable display start waiting process of step S170 shown in FIG. 34, when it is determined that the first change start command or the second change start command is received, the hold numbers are ordered in ascending order. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display for which a determination per winning time or a determination within a specific pattern common range has been made, and if there is a variable display for which these determinations have been made, it is executed before the variable display is started The variable display count may be set as the continuous notice determination buffer value. The start winning information storage unit stores the EXT data of the command corresponding to each variable display, so that it is possible to determine the winning time per hour and determine whether or not the continuous notice determination buffer value is “0”. It is possible to specify a variable display that has been determined within the pattern common range. In addition, the determination result is specified in order from the smallest holding number, and when the variable display with the winning time determination or the determination within the specific pattern common range is found, the continuous notice determination buffer value is set, What is necessary is just to complete | finish a process, without examining the determination result. As a result, after the winning time determination and the determination within the specific pattern common range are made by the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted at the time of detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) through the start winning opening first, Based on random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted at the time of detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) after the start winning opening while the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the start is not performed, determination per winning time or determination within the common range of the specific pattern is made. Even in such a case, it is possible to limit the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the subsequent start winning until the variable display based on the previous start winning ends. If the special game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the second start opening prize designation is specified when specifying the determination result. The determination result notified by the command may be read and specified first, and then the determination result notified by the first start port winning designation command may be read and specified.

  When variable display in which a continuous notice effect is executed is started, for example, after determining a notice pattern for executing a single notice effect in step S659 shown in FIG. In order not to execute the single notice effect with lower reliability than the single notice effect executed in the previous variable display until the final variable display in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed. The notice pattern may be determined. As a result, when the combination of the continuous notice effect and the single notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” can be increased stepwise to improve the game entertainment.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that the continuous notice effect can be executed over two to four variable displays. However, the continuous notice effect may be executed over more variable displays. . In this case, corresponding to the number of variable displays for which the continuous notice effect is executed, more continuous notice patterns are prepared and various continuous notice effects can be executed to enhance the effect of the continuous notice effect. Amusement entertainment can also be improved.

  In the above embodiment, even when it is determined in step S603 in FIG. 36 that the winning specific pattern is OFF, the execution of the continuous notice effect is started by executing the processes in steps S610 to S615. It was explained as being possible. On the other hand, only when the winning time determination flag is ON and when the winning specific pattern flag is ON, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be started, and the winning time determination flag and the winning time are determined. When both of the hour specific pattern flag are off, the continuous notice effect may not be started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being frequently executed, and to enhance the sense of expectation when the continuous notice effect is executed, thereby improving the game entertainment. Alternatively, when both the winning time determination flag and the winning specific pattern flag are off, the continuous notice effect is executed every time a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, “10”). A determination of whether to start may be made. Even if it does in this way, it can prevent that a continuous notice effect is performed frequently, can raise a sense of expectation when a continuous notice effect is performed, and can improve game entertainment.

  In the above embodiment, at steps S408 and S414 in FIG. 25, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is at least superreach regardless of the special figure reserved memory number that is the special figure game reserved memory number. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the specific pattern common range that becomes a specific variation pattern accompanied by the did. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 is within a common range for executing a predetermined effect operation such as a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect regardless of the number of special figure reservations stored. It may be determined whether or not the presence / absence of the production operation, the production content (production mode), and the like are determined at different rates according to the determination result. In addition, it may be determined whether or not it is within a common range in which a specific effect or the like is executed, using numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S323 in FIG. 30 that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, in step S324, setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the short-time state is performed. In the case where it is determined in step S323 that the big hit type is “probability change” or “probability”, the setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the probability change state is performed in step S325. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is determined that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the normal state is performed, and the big hit When it is determined that the type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, a setting for starting control for changing the game state to the probability change state may be performed. Alternatively, instead of “probability change” and “surprise accuracy” as a big hit type, a case of “suddenly normal” is provided. When the setting for starting the game is performed and it is determined that the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the normal state may be performed. Furthermore, instead of “probability change” and “probability” as the big hit type, a case of “sudden time reduction” is provided, and when it is determined that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the gaming state is set to the normal state When the setting for starting the control is performed and it is determined that the big hit type is “suddenly short time”, the setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the short time state may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the CPU 103 changes with reference to the fluctuation pattern type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type in step S269 of FIG. By determining the pattern type, the presence / absence of the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are determined. In the above description, it is determined whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed in the current variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the “pseudo-continuous” regardless of the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command in step S673. The presence / absence of the variable display effect and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, in step S653 in FIG. 39, the presence / absence of a single notice and the type of single notice are determined at different rates depending on whether the continuous notice execution flag is off or on, and step S659. In the above description, it is assumed that a notice pattern serving as a use pattern for executing a single notice effect is determined according to the single notice type. That is, the description has been made assuming that the notice pattern that is the use pattern for executing the single notice effect is determined at a different rate depending on the presence or absence of the continuous notice. On the other hand, the notice pattern that is the usage pattern for executing the continuous notice effect in the variable display that is started this time is the result of determining the continuous notice pattern and the remaining notice of the continuous notice regardless of the presence or absence of the single notice. It has been described that it is determined corresponding to the count value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to determine the presence / absence of a single advance notice and a notice pattern that is a use pattern for executing a single advance notice regardless of the presence / absence of a continuous notice. In the variable display that is started this time, the notice pattern that is the use pattern for executing the continuous notice effect, the decision result of the notice pattern that becomes the use pattern for executing the single notice effect, and the decision result of the continuous notice pattern Alternatively, it may be determined at a different rate according to the continuous notice remaining count value. In other words, in the variable display that is started this time, the notice pattern that is the usage pattern for executing the continuous notice effect is matched with the determination result of the presence / absence of the single notice or the notice pattern that is the use pattern for executing the single notice effect. May be determined.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S151 in FIG. 33 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received, the total reserved memory number after starting winning is set as the continuous notice determination buffer value in step S158. In step S705, based on the continuous notice determination buffer value and the random number SR1-2 for determining the continuous notice pattern, the continuous notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, so that the continuous notice effect is obtained. It has been described that the number of variable displays to be executed is determined. However, in the above embodiment, the special game using the second special figure is started prior to the special game using the first special figure. When a valid game ball winning in the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B, the number of variable displays in which the continuous notice effect determined in step S705 is executed, and the actual continuous notice. There arises a problem that the number of variable displays in which the effect is executed does not match. Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, the following processing may be executed.

  That is, when it is determined in step S159 in FIG. 33 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is in an on state. During the execution of the notice effect, 1 is added to the stored value of the winning counter during continuous notice indicating the number of game balls that have been validly received at the second start winning opening detected by the second start opening switch 22B. Then, when the continuous notice execution flag is on in step S631 of FIG. 38, the stored value of the continuous notice winning counter is decremented by 1, and the continuous notice setting process is ended as it is. In this case, during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the fact that the winning of the game ball to the second start prize opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B. Will not be. Alternatively, after the stored value of the winning counter during continuous notice is decremented by 1 in step S631, the processes in steps S632 to S635 may be executed, and then the continuous notice setting process may be terminated. In this case, in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the fact that the winning of the game ball effective at the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B during the continuous notice effect, the same content as the previous time is displayed. A continuous notice effect will be executed. In this way, the special game using the second special figure is also determined in step S705 even in the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose execution is started in preference to the special game using the first special figure. It is possible to make the number of variable displays in which the continuous notice announcement effect is performed match the number of variable displays in which the actual continuous notice effect is executed.

  In the above embodiment, during continuous notice execution in which the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the single notice effect of “operation notice” is executed, for example, the display of the effect image that makes the balloon appear in the continuous notice effect Subsequently, it has been described that an effect operation of switching to display of an effect image of a scene in which a bow and arrow passes or bursts a balloon in response to a single notice effect is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which a notice effect of “step-up operation” is executed as a single notice effect, a single notice effect of “step-up operation” is executed. When the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable display, for example, following the display of the effect image that makes the balloon appear in the continuous notice effect, the effect image of the scene where the character steps up and bursts the balloon An effect operation for switching to the display may be performed. Alternatively, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which a notice effect using a movable object is executed as a single notice effect, when a continuous notice effect is executed in a variable display in which a single notice effect using a movable object is executed, for example, An effect operation of switching to display of an effect image of a scene in which a movable object bursts a balloon may be performed following display of an effect image that causes a balloon to appear in a continuous notice effect. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the notice effect using the character image is executed as the single notice effect, when the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the single notice effect using the character image is executed, for example, Following the display of the effect image that causes the balloon to appear in the continuous notice effect, an effect operation of switching to the display of the effect image of the scene in which the mini character ruptures the balloon may be performed. The “step-up operation” single notice effect, the notice effect using a movable object, and the notice effect using a character image are limited to those that are executed as a single notice effect. Instead, all may be executed as a single notice effect. In this case, when it is determined in step S405 or step S411 shown in FIG. 25 that the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination range and the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”, these notice effects are displayed. Of these, the ratio at which a plurality of notice effects are simultaneously executed as single notice effects may be higher than the ratio at which any one is executed as a single notice effect. In this way, the jackpot reliability can be varied depending on the number of notice effects executed as the single notice effect. Also, depending on which of the “step-up action” independent notice effect, the notice effect using a movable object, and the notice effect using a character image is executed as a single notice effect, the big hit trust You may vary the degree. In this case, if it is determined in step S405 or step S411 shown in FIG. 25 that the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination range and the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”, for example, a character image is used. It is easy to select the announcement effect using the movable object, and then to select the announcement effect of the “step-up operation” most easily.

  In the above embodiment, in the setting example of the continuous notice pattern determination table 141 shown in FIG. 17A, the continuous notice pattern corresponding to the variable display count larger than the number of variable displays specified by the continuous notice determination buffer value. It has been described that it may be determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a continuous notice pattern corresponding to a variable display count that is smaller than the number of executions of variable display specified by the continuous notice determination buffer value may be determined. Good. For example, a determination value is assigned to the continuous notice pattern YRA2-1 and the continuous notice pattern YRA3-1 according to the case where the winning determination flag is ON and the continuous notice determination buffer value is “4”. Also good.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with one special symbol display device is also described. The invention can be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 performs the continuous notice determination process in step S510, the setting process in continuous notice in step S511, the single notice setting process in step S512, and the like shown in FIG. As described above, the control contents of various performance operations to be a continuous notice effect or a single notice effect are determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the rendering operations. It may be.

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. The display control board only needs to be equipped with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the display control CPU writes various variation data to the RAM and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU stores the various data in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the display control board via the I / O display control CPU, I / O for the display controlling CPU A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board via the display is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU performs steps S510 to S512 shown in FIG. 35 based on, for example, a display control command from the effect control board 12 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12. Any of the processes may be executed. The display control CPU only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. Further, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Alternatively, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12, and independent control to become the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and the effect control pattern determined by the effect control CPU 120 in step S513 in FIG. The display control command may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 2, any one of the processes executed by the production control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 is performed on any control board. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type in accordance with the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value, as a “suddenly short” or “sudden normal” jackpot. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that the table data allocated to a classification may be included. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 31 ... Operation detection switch 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

Based on the establishment of start conditions, when a specific display result was derived displayed on the variable display means for displaying the results deriving display performs variable display of identification information of a plurality of types that can identify each favorable for the player A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state,
Detection means capable of detecting movement by the player;
When the start condition is satisfied, and pre-determining means for determining a display result derived displayed before Symbol variable display means whether or not said specific display result,
Before determination by the predetermination means, beginning Doban constant means for determining whether or not is determined in the specific display result,
Based on the determination result by the prior determination means, a single notice effect execution means for executing a single notice effect based on the detection result by the detection means in the variable display in which the start condition is established;
Based on a determination result of the start Doban constant means, and a plurality of times continuously announcement attraction executing means for executing the rylene connection announcement attraction cotton on the variable display of the said variable display means,
And Kitan German announcement attraction before being executed by the single announcement demonstration execution unit, the continuous announcement in accordance with the prior Killen Continued advance notification effect executed by the effect running unit, the ratio to be controlled is different for the specific game state ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.